az2558/17
13/5/03
12:15
Page 1
Return your Warranty Registration card today to
2558
MP3-CD Soundmachine
AZ
AZ
ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to.
Return
your Warranty
Registration Card
within 10 days
EE
CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER
RETURNING THE PRODUCT!
E
S
Philips representatives are ready to help you with
any questions about your new product.We can guide you
through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features.
We want you to start enjoying your new product right away!
RTAN
PO
• So complete and return the Warranty
Registration Card enclosed with your
purchase at once, and take advantage
of these important benefits.
T!
Need help? Call us!
IM
• Once your Philips purchase is registered,
you’re eligible to receive all the privileges
of owning a Philips product.
WH
Y INS
ID
1-800-531-0039
or
Visit us on the web at www.philips.com
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Warranty
Verification
Owner
Confirmation
Model
Registration
Registering your product
within 10 days confirms
your right to maximum
protection under the
terms and conditions of
your Philips warranty.
Your completed Warranty
Registration Card serves
as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss.
Returning your Warranty
Registration Card right
away guarantees you’ll
receive all the information
and special offers which
you qualify for as the
owner of your model.
8.
9.
Know these
safety symbols
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Model No. _______________________
Serial No. ________________________
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material
within your unit may cause
an electrical shock. For the safety of
everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
WARNING: TO PREVENT
The “exclamation point” calls
attention to features for
which you should read the
enclosed literature closely to prevent
operating and maintenance problems.
shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot, and fully insert.
FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO
NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION: To prevent electric
10.
11.
English
Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous
assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit.
• Dès que l’achat de votre appareil
Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à
tous les avantages dont bénéficient les
possesseurs des produits Philips.
Meet Philips at the Internet
• Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte
d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à
votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants.
Français
Español
Vérification
de garantie
Confirmation
de possession
Enregistrement
du modèle
Enregistrez votre produit
dans les 10 jours pour
confirmer votre droit à
une protection maximum
selon les termes et les
conditions de votre
garantie Philips.
Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie
prouve que vous possédez
l’appareil en cas de vol ou
de perte du produit.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès
aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les
informations, les offres et les
bonus auxquels vous avez
droit en tant que possesseur
de ce modèle.
AZ 2558
symboles de
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
sécurite
ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER
LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE
PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A
UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE.
Cet « éclair à pointe de
flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur
de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc
électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun,
nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le
boîtier de ce produit.
Printed in China
Canada
English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les
limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur
le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada.
Le « point d’exclamation »
attire votre attention sur des
sujets risquant de provoquer
des problèmes de fonctionnement et
d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant.
Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures :
– Relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une
3.
Respectez les avertissements.
étagère ou une table de type recom-
4.
Suivez toutes les instructions.
mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un
N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une
meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer
source d’eau.
avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci-
5.
7.
8.
12.
dent corporel si l’équipement se renver-
fon sec.
sait.
N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation.
doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps
fabricant.
prolongée.
N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de
amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur.
d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap-
Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la
pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap-
prise de terre ou prise
pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne
polarisée fournie. Une
fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute.
Prise
polarisée C.A.
IMPORTANT :
Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to
operate this device.
Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima
protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la
garantía de Philips.
Su Tarjeta de Registro de
la Garantía comprueba
que Ud. es el dueño del
aparato en caso de robo
o pérdida del producto.
La devolución inmediata de
su Tarjeta de Registro de la
Garantía le garantiza que
recibirá toda la información
y todas las promociones
especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño
de su modelo.
seguridad
dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est
blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou
dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième,
d’endommager l’appareil :
PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE
LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA
PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN
SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO.
El símbolo del «rayo» indica
que algún material no aislado
dentro de su unidad podría
resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para
la seguridad de todos, favor de no
remover la cubierta del producto.
de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement
El «signo de exclamación» le
llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud.
debe leer la información adjunta
detenidamente para evitar problemas
de funcionamiento y mantenimiento.
WHO IS COVERED?
You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product.
A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach
it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby.
WHAT IS COVERED?
Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product.
For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product
will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered
only for the original warranty period.When the warranty
on the original product expires, the warranty on the
replacement product also expires.
WHAT IS EXCLUDED?
Your warranty does not cover:
• labor charges for installation or setup of the product,
adjustment of customer controls on the product, and
installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the
product.
• product repair and/or part replacement because of
misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause
not within the control of Philips.
• reception problems caused by signal conditions or
cable or antenna systems outside the unit.
• a product that requires modification or adaptation to
enable it to operate in any country other than the
country for which it was designed, manufactured,
approved and/or authorized, or repair of products
damaged by these modifications.
• incidental or consequential damages resulting from the
product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above
exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not
limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted
or not copyrighted.)
• a product used for commercial or institutional purposes.
WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE?
You may exchange the product in all countries where the
product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries
where Philips does not distribute the product, the local
Philips service organization will attempt to provide a
replacement product (although there may be a delay if the
appropriate product is not readily available).
BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE...
Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you
have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039.
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A.,
PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS...
Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship
the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of
purchase enclosed, to the address listed below.
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the
duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do
not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may
last, this limitation may not apply to you.)
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA...
Please contact Philips at:
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking)
(In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied,
including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any
circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or
consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified
of the possibility of such damages.)
REMEMBER...
Please record below the model and serial numbers found
on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty
registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify
you if necessary.
MODEL #
__________________________________
SERIAL #
__________________________________
lines, etc.).
●
Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période.
EL 6475-F003: 02/8
Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II
Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation.
INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8.
9.
10.
11.
MAC5097
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Échange gratuite pendant un an
Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger.
QUI EST COUVERT ?
Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir
bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou
un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que
vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme
preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les
garder tous les deux à portée de main.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ?
La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où
vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette
date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas
sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit
comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit
de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période
non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du
produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de
remplacement est terminée aussi.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ?
La garantie ne couvre pas :
• les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer,
pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer
les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit.
• la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du
mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées
ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par
Philips.
• des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal,
au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité.
• un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations
pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que
le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou
autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par
de telles modifications.
• des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du
produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas
l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est
donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au
cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative,
des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les
lois sur les droits d’auteur).
• un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou
institutionnelles.
OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ?
Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit
est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où
Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service
Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais
il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas
facilement disponible).
Lea estas instrucciones.
Conserve estas instrucciones.
Lea todos los avisos.
Siga todas las instrucciones.
No utilice este aparato cerca del
agua.
Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo
un trapo seco.
No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de
acuerdo con las instrucciones del
fabricante.
No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes
de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores,
estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor.
No anule la
seguridad de la
clavija de corriente
Clavija
polarizada
(ya sea de tipo polarde CA
izado o
con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas
tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la
otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra
tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la
de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más
ancha como la toma de tierra han sido
incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad
personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el
equipo no es compatible con su toma de
corriente, consulte a un electricista para
sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta.
Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más
próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida
del equipo.
Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados
por el fabricante.
12.
Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros,
bases, trípodes, soportes o
mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el
equipo. Cuando utilice un carro,
tenga cuidado al desplazar el
conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco.
13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser
utilizado durante largo tiempo.
14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las
reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre
que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el
cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que
hubieran podido introducirse en su interior,
por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a
ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no
funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera
sufrido algún tipo de caída.
15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para
prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden
ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a
su propiedad o dañar la unidad:
● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad.
● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o
de carbono y alcalinas, etc.).
● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la
unidad durante largo tiempo.
EL 6475-S003: 02/8
Símbolo del equipo Clase II
Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento.
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
– remote control
– USB cable
– video cable
– CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers
– AC power cord
TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1)
1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack.
Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones
are connected to the set.
2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level
(BASS/ MID /HIGH)
3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off.
4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/
TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX
5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control
6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set
7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power.
8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
SEARCH ∞ , §
MP3-CD / CD :
- searches backward or forward ;
- skips to the beginning of a current track/
previous/ later track.
USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a
previous/ later track.
TUNER : - tunes to radio stations
2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
MODE :
- selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat
or shuffle order.
9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the
USB port of your computer
0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode
WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off
EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high
frequencies.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
GARANTIE LIMITÉE
AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE…
Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance.
Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au
1-800-531-0039.
POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES
ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES…
Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange.
Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec
preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous :
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie
implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude
à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie
explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces
ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite,
cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.)
POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AU CANADA…
Veuillez contacter Philips au :
1-800-661-6162 (Francophone)
1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone)
(Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute
autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle
soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite
de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est
pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit
directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents,
quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une
notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.)
RAPPEL IMPORTANT...
Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de
série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez
remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de
garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en
cas de besoin.
Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________
Nº DE SÉRIE
_____________________________
options recommandés par le fabricant.
No. de serie ______________________
sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla
ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha.
des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca-
11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou
No. de modelo ____________________
PRECAUCION: Para evitar
Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec
de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même.
Para uso del cliente:
Escriba abajo el número de serie que se
encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde
esta información para el futuro.
TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA
ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO
EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA
NI A HUMEDAD.
Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels
qu’indiqués sur l’appareil.
●
aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point
7.
ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI-
●
10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter
PRECAUCION
RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA
NO ABRIR
toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des
pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale.
MAC5097
Registro
del modelo
15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter
sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise
chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne
correspondante de la prise et pousser
jusqu’au fond.
• Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida
la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
empacada con su aparato y saque
provecho de estas ventajas importantes.
qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a
subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon
deux lames
DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les
14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel
de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des
prise polarisée est dotée de
N° de série ______________________
CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A
UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR
ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE
ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE.
13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il
Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du
chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches
9.
Utilisez uniquement un meuble
Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif-
plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre
Confirmación
del dueño
simbolos de
One Year Free Exchange
This product must be carried in for an exchange.
EL 6475-E004: 02/8
Conservez ces instructions.
N° de modèle ____________________
Verificación
de la garantía
Conozca estos
●
2.
6.
The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
●
PORTABLE AUDIO
SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE
Cet espace vous est réservé
Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé
à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir.
Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes.
• Una vez que se registre la compra de
su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a
todas las ventajas correspondientes al
dueño de un producto Philips.
●
Lisez ces instructions.
murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien
3140 115 3102.1
15.
1.
AT T E N T I O N
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
14.
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES
6.
Connaissez ces
13.
Use only with the cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer or
sold with the apparatus. When a
cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning
storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent
battery leakage which may result in bodily
injury, property damage, or damage to the
unit:
Install all batteries correctly, + and - as
marked on the unit.
Do not mix batteries (old and new or
carbon and alkaline, etc.).
Remove batteries when the unit is not
used for a long time.
Class II equipment symbol
This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system.
http://www.philips.com
W
12.
English
This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
MAC5097
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near
water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the
manufacturer´s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
Do not defeat
the safety
purpose of the
AC Polarized
polarized or
Plug
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has
two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and
a third grounding prong.The wide blade or
the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being
walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories
specified by the manufacturer.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171
IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS
Supported formats:
• Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session
CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs.
• MP3 music fomats.
• MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable
bit rate.
• 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs.
• Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels
(max. 64 characters).
General information
The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio
Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a
factor up to 10 without losing significant sound
quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of
CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM.
How to get MP3 music
Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or
convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3
encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W).
• To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at
least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files.
• Some encoder software offer an option to protect
music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the
computer which created them. If you burn such
files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this
set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option
in the encoder software before creating the music
files. In this case you are responsible for
adherence to all local or international copyrights.
When burning the MP3-CD
• To avoid problems with playback or missing files,
make sure the file names are typed in English text
characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3
• Use a writing software capable of recording MP3
track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical
order. For details on using the software, refer to
the operating instructions of the software.
• When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you
close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to
read and play your tracks.
CONTROL
PROG
MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the
programmed songs;
TUNER : - programs radio stations.
FM•AM / DISPLAY
FM•AM : - selects waveband
DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions
! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for
external audio appliance.
VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place
@ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door
BACK PANEL (See 1)
# Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception
$ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type
R-20, UM-1 or D-cells
% AC MAINS - inlet for power cord
^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a
TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
REMOTE CONTROL (See 1)
1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source
TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands
USB - selects USB PC LINK
AUX - selects GAME •AUX
2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set
operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if
battery powered)
3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source
or selects the repeat modes in CD source
SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random
order in CD / USB PC LINK source
MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound
4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer
level (BASS/ MID /HIGH)
5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD /
USB PC LINK playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a
MP3-CD / CD track.
TUNER: - tunes to radio stations
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
How to organize MP3 files
You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums
and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song
file sizes.
Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted.
• MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as
numbers in the display.
IMPORTANT!
This set does not play/support the following:
• Empty albums: an empty album is an album that
does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown
in the display.
• Non-supported file formats are skipped. This
means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3
files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not
be played.
• Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC,
Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer
7.0, MusicMatch.
• Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and
Package Writing.
Playing MP3-CD & CD
This CD player plays Audio Discs including
CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs.
• CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not
possible.
1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then
select CD SOURCE.
2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door.
]
is displayed when the CD door is
open.
3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press
down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door.
]Display show
,when reading disc
contents;
]Display :
if no disc inserted/
disc incorrectly inserted.,
]Display :
or
if disc damaged / dirty:.
–
throughout CD operation;
–
throughout MP3-CD operation;
– In CD stop mode: total track number and total
playback time.
POWER SUPPLY
BASIC FUNCTIONS
6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high
frequencies
WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off
GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode
7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY
As a power-saving feature, the system automatically
switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has
reached the end and no control is operated.
POWER SUPPLY
Whenever convenient, use the power supply to
conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the
power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting
batteries.
Switching on and off and selecting function
1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on.
2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your
desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or
GAME•AUX .
3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Batteries (not included) (See 1)
• Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells,
(preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity.
Remote control (See A)
• Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4
(preferably alkaline).
Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the
batteries to burst.
• Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon
zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set.
• When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old
batteries with the new ones.
• Batteries contain chemical substances, so
they should be disposed of properly.
Using AC Power
1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the
type plate located on the bottom of the set,
corresponds to your local power supply. If it does
not, consult your dealer or service center.
2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector,
adjust the selector so that it matches with the
local power supply.
3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the
set is now ready for use.
4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set
from the wall jack.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
–
is shown if you have inserted a
non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc.
Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to
read.
4. Press 2; to start playback.
=Display: Current track number and elapsed track
time during MP3-CD / CD playback.
=If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown.
5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to
resume play.
= Time digits flashes during pause.
6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9.
7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when:
– the CD door is opened
– the CD has reached the end
– you select other sound source.
MP3-CD/ CD text display
During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information:
MP3-CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– track name and elapsed track time;
– album name and elapsed track time;
– album number, track number and elapsed track
time;
– ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display
shows
.
CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback;
– Remaining playback time of current track.
Selecting a different track
• Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡
or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track
number appears in the display.
• If you have selected a track number shortly after
loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will
need to press 2; to start playback.
The type plate is located on the bottom of
the set.
BASIC FUNCTIONS
Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and
the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of
VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory.
Adjusting volume and sound (See 2)
1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control.
= Display shows the volume level
and a
number from 0-32.
2. wOOx
To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or
more to switch on / off.
= wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is
turned on.
Notes:
- wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
- Some discs might be recorded in high modulation,
which causes a distortion at high volume. If this
occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume.
3. EQUALIZER
To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press
EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME
within 3 seconds to adjust each level.
=Display briefly shows
, or
,
level (-5 to +5) or
.
Note:
1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album.
] Display:
if no albums are
available.
Finding a passage within a track
1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote
control 5 or 6).
– The CD is played at high speed and low volume.
– No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/
review.
2. When you recognize the passage you want,
release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on
the remote control 5 or 6)
Note: Searching is only possible within a track.
Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See
4 - 7)
You can select and change the various play modes
before or during playback. The play modes can also be
combined with PROGRAM.
shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are
played in random order
shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program
continuously in random order
repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program
repeat - plays the current track continuously
1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more.
(SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control).
2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position.
]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts
automatically.
3. To select normal playback, press MODE
repeatedly until the various modes are no longer
displayed.
– You can also press the 9 to cancel your play
mode in playing.
DIGITAL TUNER
2. To prevent sound interference the bass control
options operate exclusively. You cannot combine
the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx
4. GAMESOUND
To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once
or more to select your option.
=Display briefly shows
,
,
or
.
DIGITAL TUNER
1
until you have found optimal reception.
To improve radio reception:
• For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic
antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too
strong.
• For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this
antenna by turning the whole set.
HEAVY !
Take care of your CD Soundmachine.
Grip both handles when you carry or
lift the set.
Programming tuner stations:
1
Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you
play in GAME•AUX source.
You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the
memory, manually or automatically (Autostore).
2
How to MUTE the sound
1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt
sound reproduction instantly.
= Playback continues without sound and the
display flashes
.
Autostore
Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The
set will only program stations which are not in the
memory already.
1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
select the preset number .
2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate
auto store programming.
= Display:
is shown and available
stations are programmed in order of waveband
FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then
be played after all stations are stored
automatically.
2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can:
– press MUTE again;
– adjust the volume controls;
– change to another source.
DIGITAL TUNER (See 3)
Tuning to stations
1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press
SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press
TUNER once on the remote control).
= Display: shows
briefly followed by
waveband, frequency, and preset station
number if already stored.
2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select
your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control)
3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your
stations manually or by automatic search tuning:
Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote
control ) and release button when the frequency in
the display starts running.
= The radio automatically tunes to a station of
sufficient reception. Display shows
during automatic tuning.
4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the
desired station.
• To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or
6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
Programming track numbers
Program in the stop position to select and store your
CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store
any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be
stored in the memory.
1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your
desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or
™)
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the
remote control ¡ or ™).
2. Press PROG.
™ Display: program and the selected track
number
appears briefly.
™ Display :
if no track
selected for programming.
3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired
tracks.
™ Display:
if you try to program more
than 20 tracks.
4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;.
Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG
to add a current track to your program list.
Reviewing the program
In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a
while until the display shows all your stored track
numbers in sequence.
=Display
if no tracks programmed.
Erasing a program
You can erase the program by:
• pressing 9 twice;
=
displayed briefly, and program
disappears.
• pressing STANDBY ON y
• selecting another sound source
• opening the CD door.
@
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
Manual programming
1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to
stations).
2. Press PROG to activate programming.
= Display: program flashes.
1
#3
3
5
4
5
$
5. Repeat the above four steps to store other
stations.
Note : You can erase a preset station by storing
another frequency in its place.
2
4
3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station.
4. Press PROG again to confirm.
= Display shows the preset number, waveband
and the frequency of the preset station.
7
^
8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL
6
%
To listen to a preset station
Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until
the desired preset station is displayed.
GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
0
GAMESOUND (See 8)
PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND:
1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the
GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control)
=Display scrolls :
2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front
of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO
IN.
3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your
game sound option.
,
,
=Display briefly shows
or
.
Connecting other equipment to your system
Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO
OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on
a TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
USB PC LINK
Quick Setup Guide
PC system requirements
– USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP
– Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher
– CD-ROM drive
Installing MusicMatch software
1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the
USB port on your computer. (See B)
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or
more to select USB PC LINK.
3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK
installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This
application software can also be downloaded from
http://www.audio.philips.com.
IMPORTANT!
Please use this customized MusicMatch
software for your USB PC Link application.
Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch
jukebox software first from your PC system (if
available).
X
6
A
B
2 x AAA
USB
EL6095T004 / 8-02
USB PC LINK
USB PC LINK
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
GARANTIA LIMITADA
SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL
Cambio gratis por un año
Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo.
¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION?
Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el
producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando
que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante
de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo
a la mano.
¿QUE CUBRE?
La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que
usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta
fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso
con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un
producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el
período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía
original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del
producto de reemplazo.
¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA?
Su garantía no cubre:
• cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje
del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de
preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con
antena fuera de la unidad.
• reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz
de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u
otra causa no bajo el control de Philips.
• problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de
señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la
unidad.
• un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para
que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue
concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la
reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones.
• daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del
producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por
daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible
que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.
Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin
amparo de derechos de autor.)
• una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o
institucionales.
¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO?
Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con
distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países
donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de
servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo
(aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no
está fácilmente disponible).
ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO…
Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda.
Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039.
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS
EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES…
Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio.
También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y
transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante
de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación:
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía
implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y
aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en
cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto
que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la
duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación
arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.)
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL
CANADA…
Favor de comunicarse con Philips al:
1-800-661-6162 (francófono)
1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante)
(En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda
otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni
implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita
de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips
no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y
perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o
consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada,
aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.)
RECUERDE…
Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del
producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y
enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía.
Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario.
Modelo No.
________________________________
Serie No.
________________________________
4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it
does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows
Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe.
Then perform the following steps:
– Select your desired language from the list.
– Select installer driver.
– Select installer MusicMatch jukebox.
– Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies,
FAQ).
Note:
- You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial
before using it for the first time. Make sure the
volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure
sound output on the set. For optimum performance,
the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to
a low level.
5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create
your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and
dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC
into the playlist window.
Note:
-- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK,
please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)
stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit
www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates .
After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link"
for details on the USB PC LINK operations.
Enable digital CD audio output
Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is
necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows:
For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP
1. Enter the system panel menu and select
'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE',
'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and
'PROPERTIES'.
For Windows 98 SE
2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled).
Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer
to your PC's manual for correct configuration.
Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9)
The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set.
IMPORTANT!
Make sure the MusicMatch software has been
installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the
USB PC Link.
1. Turn on your set and computer .
] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and
not set to minimum / mute.
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once
or more to select USB PC LINK .
3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically
launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX.
] If the audio streaming is detected, the current
track name scrolls .
] If
scrolls for a while, check
the connection between your PC and set.
4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist
is highlighted.
5. Press 2; to start playback.
] The track time appears and the track name
scrolls once.
Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase.
6. If you want to see the track details displayed press
MODE.
During playback,
– Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all
available tracks in the playlist in random order.
– Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat
playback all the tracks in the playlist.
7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or
select another sound sources.
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0)
CD player and disc handling
• If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a
cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set
to repair.
• The lens of the CD player should never be touched!
• Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature
can cause condensation on the lens of your CD
player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not
attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a
warm environment until the moisture evaporates.
• To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the
center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free
cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may
damage the disc.
• Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it.
Safety Information
• Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity,
rain, sand or excessive heat.
• Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning
agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set.
• Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the
system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating.
• Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.
• Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus
(e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles).
If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable
to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center.
CAUTION
WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation.
circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty.
No sound /power
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
•
•
–
•
Volume not adjusted
Adjust the VOLUME
Power cord not securely connected
Connect the AC power cord properly
Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Headphones connected to the set
Disconnect headphones
Electrostatic discharge/interference
Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries
from the battery compartment. Press and hold
STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug /
replace battery supply, and try activating the set again.
When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's
volume is audible and not set to minimum.
When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer
to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output.
CD contains non-audio files
Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to
a CD audio track, instead of the data file
Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode
• Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console
Severe radio hum or noise
– Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or
computer
• Move the set to increase the distance
Remote control does not function properly
–
•
–
•
Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Distance/ angle between the set too large
Reduce the distance/ angle
Poor radio reception
– Weak radio signal
• FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial
indication
– CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized
• Use an unfinalized CD-R(W)
indication
–
•
–
•
–
•
No CD inserted
Inserted a suitable disc
CD badly scratched or dirty
Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance
Laser lens steamed up
Wait until lens has cleared
The CD skips tracks
– CD damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean CD
– shuffle or program is active
• Switch off shuffle / program
is displayed in USB PC LINK
mode for more than 10 sconds
– Check the connection between your PC and the set. If
necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to
USB PC Link for the initial setup required.
• Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the
MusicMatch software is working.
Sound skips during MP3 playback
– MP3 file made at compression level exceeding
320kbps
• Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks
into MP3 format
– Disc damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean disc
Cannot find desired MP3 title
– Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with
unsuitable text characters used
• Make sure the file names are typed in English
text characters an that the MP3 files end with
.mp3
Environmental information
We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3
materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene.
Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized
company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the
disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment.
Philips AZ2558
Tested To Comply
With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Philips Consumer Electronics North America
One Philips Drive
Knoxville TN 37914
Phone: 1-800-531-0039
az2558/17
13/5/03
12:15
Page 1
Return your Warranty Registration card today to
2558
MP3-CD Soundmachine
AZ
AZ
ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to.
Return
your Warranty
Registration Card
within 10 days
EE
CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER
RETURNING THE PRODUCT!
E
S
Philips representatives are ready to help you with
any questions about your new product.We can guide you
through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features.
We want you to start enjoying your new product right away!
RTAN
PO
• So complete and return the Warranty
Registration Card enclosed with your
purchase at once, and take advantage
of these important benefits.
T!
Need help? Call us!
IM
• Once your Philips purchase is registered,
you’re eligible to receive all the privileges
of owning a Philips product.
WH
Y INS
ID
1-800-531-0039
or
Visit us on the web at www.philips.com
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Warranty
Verification
Owner
Confirmation
Model
Registration
Registering your product
within 10 days confirms
your right to maximum
protection under the
terms and conditions of
your Philips warranty.
Your completed Warranty
Registration Card serves
as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss.
Returning your Warranty
Registration Card right
away guarantees you’ll
receive all the information
and special offers which
you qualify for as the
owner of your model.
8.
9.
Know these
safety symbols
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Model No. _______________________
Serial No. ________________________
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material
within your unit may cause
an electrical shock. For the safety of
everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
WARNING: TO PREVENT
The “exclamation point” calls
attention to features for
which you should read the
enclosed literature closely to prevent
operating and maintenance problems.
shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot, and fully insert.
FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO
NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION: To prevent electric
10.
11.
English
Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous
assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit.
• Dès que l’achat de votre appareil
Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à
tous les avantages dont bénéficient les
possesseurs des produits Philips.
Meet Philips at the Internet
• Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte
d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à
votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants.
Français
Español
Vérification
de garantie
Confirmation
de possession
Enregistrement
du modèle
Enregistrez votre produit
dans les 10 jours pour
confirmer votre droit à
une protection maximum
selon les termes et les
conditions de votre
garantie Philips.
Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie
prouve que vous possédez
l’appareil en cas de vol ou
de perte du produit.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès
aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les
informations, les offres et les
bonus auxquels vous avez
droit en tant que possesseur
de ce modèle.
AZ 2558
symboles de
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
sécurite
ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER
LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE
PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A
UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE.
Cet « éclair à pointe de
flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur
de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc
électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun,
nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le
boîtier de ce produit.
Printed in China
Canada
English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les
limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur
le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada.
Le « point d’exclamation »
attire votre attention sur des
sujets risquant de provoquer
des problèmes de fonctionnement et
d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant.
Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures :
– Relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une
3.
Respectez les avertissements.
étagère ou une table de type recom-
4.
Suivez toutes les instructions.
mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un
N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une
meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer
source d’eau.
avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci-
5.
7.
8.
12.
dent corporel si l’équipement se renver-
fon sec.
sait.
N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation.
doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps
fabricant.
prolongée.
N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de
amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur.
d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap-
Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la
pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap-
prise de terre ou prise
pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne
polarisée fournie. Une
fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute.
Prise
polarisée C.A.
IMPORTANT :
Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to
operate this device.
Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima
protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la
garantía de Philips.
Su Tarjeta de Registro de
la Garantía comprueba
que Ud. es el dueño del
aparato en caso de robo
o pérdida del producto.
La devolución inmediata de
su Tarjeta de Registro de la
Garantía le garantiza que
recibirá toda la información
y todas las promociones
especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño
de su modelo.
seguridad
dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est
blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou
dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième,
d’endommager l’appareil :
PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE
LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA
PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN
SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO.
El símbolo del «rayo» indica
que algún material no aislado
dentro de su unidad podría
resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para
la seguridad de todos, favor de no
remover la cubierta del producto.
de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement
El «signo de exclamación» le
llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud.
debe leer la información adjunta
detenidamente para evitar problemas
de funcionamiento y mantenimiento.
WHO IS COVERED?
You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product.
A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach
it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby.
WHAT IS COVERED?
Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product.
For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product
will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered
only for the original warranty period.When the warranty
on the original product expires, the warranty on the
replacement product also expires.
WHAT IS EXCLUDED?
Your warranty does not cover:
• labor charges for installation or setup of the product,
adjustment of customer controls on the product, and
installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the
product.
• product repair and/or part replacement because of
misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause
not within the control of Philips.
• reception problems caused by signal conditions or
cable or antenna systems outside the unit.
• a product that requires modification or adaptation to
enable it to operate in any country other than the
country for which it was designed, manufactured,
approved and/or authorized, or repair of products
damaged by these modifications.
• incidental or consequential damages resulting from the
product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above
exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not
limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted
or not copyrighted.)
• a product used for commercial or institutional purposes.
WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE?
You may exchange the product in all countries where the
product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries
where Philips does not distribute the product, the local
Philips service organization will attempt to provide a
replacement product (although there may be a delay if the
appropriate product is not readily available).
BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE...
Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you
have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039.
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A.,
PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS...
Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship
the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of
purchase enclosed, to the address listed below.
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the
duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do
not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may
last, this limitation may not apply to you.)
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA...
Please contact Philips at:
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking)
(In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied,
including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any
circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or
consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified
of the possibility of such damages.)
REMEMBER...
Please record below the model and serial numbers found
on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty
registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify
you if necessary.
MODEL #
__________________________________
SERIAL #
__________________________________
lines, etc.).
●
Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période.
EL 6475-F003: 02/8
Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II
Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation.
INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8.
9.
10.
11.
MAC5097
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Échange gratuite pendant un an
Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger.
QUI EST COUVERT ?
Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir
bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou
un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que
vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme
preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les
garder tous les deux à portée de main.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ?
La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où
vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette
date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas
sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit
comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit
de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période
non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du
produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de
remplacement est terminée aussi.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ?
La garantie ne couvre pas :
• les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer,
pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer
les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit.
• la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du
mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées
ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par
Philips.
• des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal,
au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité.
• un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations
pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que
le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou
autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par
de telles modifications.
• des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du
produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas
l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est
donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au
cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative,
des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les
lois sur les droits d’auteur).
• un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou
institutionnelles.
OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ?
Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit
est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où
Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service
Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais
il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas
facilement disponible).
Lea estas instrucciones.
Conserve estas instrucciones.
Lea todos los avisos.
Siga todas las instrucciones.
No utilice este aparato cerca del
agua.
Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo
un trapo seco.
No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de
acuerdo con las instrucciones del
fabricante.
No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes
de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores,
estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor.
No anule la
seguridad de la
clavija de corriente
Clavija
polarizada
(ya sea de tipo polarde CA
izado o
con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas
tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la
otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra
tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la
de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más
ancha como la toma de tierra han sido
incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad
personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el
equipo no es compatible con su toma de
corriente, consulte a un electricista para
sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta.
Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más
próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida
del equipo.
Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados
por el fabricante.
12.
Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros,
bases, trípodes, soportes o
mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el
equipo. Cuando utilice un carro,
tenga cuidado al desplazar el
conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco.
13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser
utilizado durante largo tiempo.
14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las
reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre
que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el
cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que
hubieran podido introducirse en su interior,
por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a
ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no
funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera
sufrido algún tipo de caída.
15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para
prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden
ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a
su propiedad o dañar la unidad:
● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad.
● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o
de carbono y alcalinas, etc.).
● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la
unidad durante largo tiempo.
EL 6475-S003: 02/8
Símbolo del equipo Clase II
Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento.
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
– remote control
– USB cable
– video cable
– CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers
– AC power cord
TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1)
1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack.
Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones
are connected to the set.
2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level
(BASS/ MID /HIGH)
3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off.
4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/
TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX
5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control
6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set
7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power.
8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
SEARCH ∞ , §
MP3-CD / CD :
- searches backward or forward ;
- skips to the beginning of a current track/
previous/ later track.
USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a
previous/ later track.
TUNER : - tunes to radio stations
2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
MODE :
- selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat
or shuffle order.
9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the
USB port of your computer
0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode
WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off
EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high
frequencies.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
GARANTIE LIMITÉE
AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE…
Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance.
Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au
1-800-531-0039.
POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES
ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES…
Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange.
Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec
preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous :
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie
implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude
à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie
explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces
ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite,
cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.)
POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AU CANADA…
Veuillez contacter Philips au :
1-800-661-6162 (Francophone)
1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone)
(Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute
autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle
soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite
de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est
pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit
directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents,
quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une
notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.)
RAPPEL IMPORTANT...
Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de
série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez
remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de
garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en
cas de besoin.
Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________
Nº DE SÉRIE
_____________________________
options recommandés par le fabricant.
No. de serie ______________________
sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla
ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha.
des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca-
11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou
No. de modelo ____________________
PRECAUCION: Para evitar
Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec
de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même.
Para uso del cliente:
Escriba abajo el número de serie que se
encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde
esta información para el futuro.
TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA
ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO
EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA
NI A HUMEDAD.
Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels
qu’indiqués sur l’appareil.
●
aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point
7.
ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI-
●
10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter
PRECAUCION
RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA
NO ABRIR
toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des
pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale.
MAC5097
Registro
del modelo
15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter
sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise
chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne
correspondante de la prise et pousser
jusqu’au fond.
• Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida
la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
empacada con su aparato y saque
provecho de estas ventajas importantes.
qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a
subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon
deux lames
DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les
14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel
de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des
prise polarisée est dotée de
N° de série ______________________
CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A
UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR
ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE
ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE.
13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il
Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du
chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches
9.
Utilisez uniquement un meuble
Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif-
plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre
Confirmación
del dueño
simbolos de
One Year Free Exchange
This product must be carried in for an exchange.
EL 6475-E004: 02/8
Conservez ces instructions.
N° de modèle ____________________
Verificación
de la garantía
Conozca estos
●
2.
6.
The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
●
PORTABLE AUDIO
SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE
Cet espace vous est réservé
Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé
à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir.
Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes.
• Una vez que se registre la compra de
su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a
todas las ventajas correspondientes al
dueño de un producto Philips.
●
Lisez ces instructions.
murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien
3140 115 3102.1
15.
1.
AT T E N T I O N
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
14.
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES
6.
Connaissez ces
13.
Use only with the cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer or
sold with the apparatus. When a
cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning
storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent
battery leakage which may result in bodily
injury, property damage, or damage to the
unit:
Install all batteries correctly, + and - as
marked on the unit.
Do not mix batteries (old and new or
carbon and alkaline, etc.).
Remove batteries when the unit is not
used for a long time.
Class II equipment symbol
This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system.
http://www.philips.com
W
12.
English
This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
MAC5097
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near
water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the
manufacturer´s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
Do not defeat
the safety
purpose of the
AC Polarized
polarized or
Plug
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has
two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and
a third grounding prong.The wide blade or
the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being
walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories
specified by the manufacturer.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171
IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS
Supported formats:
• Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session
CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs.
• MP3 music fomats.
• MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable
bit rate.
• 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs.
• Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels
(max. 64 characters).
General information
The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio
Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a
factor up to 10 without losing significant sound
quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of
CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM.
How to get MP3 music
Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or
convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3
encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W).
• To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at
least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files.
• Some encoder software offer an option to protect
music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the
computer which created them. If you burn such
files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this
set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option
in the encoder software before creating the music
files. In this case you are responsible for
adherence to all local or international copyrights.
When burning the MP3-CD
• To avoid problems with playback or missing files,
make sure the file names are typed in English text
characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3
• Use a writing software capable of recording MP3
track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical
order. For details on using the software, refer to
the operating instructions of the software.
• When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you
close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to
read and play your tracks.
CONTROL
PROG
MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the
programmed songs;
TUNER : - programs radio stations.
FM•AM / DISPLAY
FM•AM : - selects waveband
DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions
! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for
external audio appliance.
VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place
@ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door
BACK PANEL (See 1)
# Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception
$ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type
R-20, UM-1 or D-cells
% AC MAINS - inlet for power cord
^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a
TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
REMOTE CONTROL (See 1)
1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source
TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands
USB - selects USB PC LINK
AUX - selects GAME •AUX
2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set
operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if
battery powered)
3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source
or selects the repeat modes in CD source
SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random
order in CD / USB PC LINK source
MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound
4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer
level (BASS/ MID /HIGH)
5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD /
USB PC LINK playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a
MP3-CD / CD track.
TUNER: - tunes to radio stations
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
How to organize MP3 files
You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums
and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song
file sizes.
Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted.
• MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as
numbers in the display.
IMPORTANT!
This set does not play/support the following:
• Empty albums: an empty album is an album that
does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown
in the display.
• Non-supported file formats are skipped. This
means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3
files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not
be played.
• Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC,
Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer
7.0, MusicMatch.
• Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and
Package Writing.
Playing MP3-CD & CD
This CD player plays Audio Discs including
CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs.
• CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not
possible.
1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then
select CD SOURCE.
2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door.
]
is displayed when the CD door is
open.
3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press
down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door.
]Display show
,when reading disc
contents;
]Display :
if no disc inserted/
disc incorrectly inserted.,
]Display :
or
if disc damaged / dirty:.
–
throughout CD operation;
–
throughout MP3-CD operation;
– In CD stop mode: total track number and total
playback time.
POWER SUPPLY
BASIC FUNCTIONS
6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high
frequencies
WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off
GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode
7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY
As a power-saving feature, the system automatically
switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has
reached the end and no control is operated.
POWER SUPPLY
Whenever convenient, use the power supply to
conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the
power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting
batteries.
Switching on and off and selecting function
1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on.
2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your
desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or
GAME•AUX .
3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Batteries (not included) (See 1)
• Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells,
(preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity.
Remote control (See A)
• Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4
(preferably alkaline).
Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the
batteries to burst.
• Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon
zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set.
• When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old
batteries with the new ones.
• Batteries contain chemical substances, so
they should be disposed of properly.
Using AC Power
1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the
type plate located on the bottom of the set,
corresponds to your local power supply. If it does
not, consult your dealer or service center.
2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector,
adjust the selector so that it matches with the
local power supply.
3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the
set is now ready for use.
4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set
from the wall jack.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
–
is shown if you have inserted a
non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc.
Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to
read.
4. Press 2; to start playback.
=Display: Current track number and elapsed track
time during MP3-CD / CD playback.
=If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown.
5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to
resume play.
= Time digits flashes during pause.
6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9.
7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when:
– the CD door is opened
– the CD has reached the end
– you select other sound source.
MP3-CD/ CD text display
During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information:
MP3-CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– track name and elapsed track time;
– album name and elapsed track time;
– album number, track number and elapsed track
time;
– ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display
shows
.
CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback;
– Remaining playback time of current track.
Selecting a different track
• Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡
or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track
number appears in the display.
• If you have selected a track number shortly after
loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will
need to press 2; to start playback.
The type plate is located on the bottom of
the set.
BASIC FUNCTIONS
Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and
the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of
VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory.
Adjusting volume and sound (See 2)
1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control.
= Display shows the volume level
and a
number from 0-32.
2. wOOx
To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or
more to switch on / off.
= wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is
turned on.
Notes:
- wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
- Some discs might be recorded in high modulation,
which causes a distortion at high volume. If this
occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume.
3. EQUALIZER
To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press
EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME
within 3 seconds to adjust each level.
=Display briefly shows
, or
,
level (-5 to +5) or
.
Note:
1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album.
] Display:
if no albums are
available.
Finding a passage within a track
1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote
control 5 or 6).
– The CD is played at high speed and low volume.
– No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/
review.
2. When you recognize the passage you want,
release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on
the remote control 5 or 6)
Note: Searching is only possible within a track.
Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See
4 - 7)
You can select and change the various play modes
before or during playback. The play modes can also be
combined with PROGRAM.
shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are
played in random order
shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program
continuously in random order
repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program
repeat - plays the current track continuously
1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more.
(SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control).
2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position.
]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts
automatically.
3. To select normal playback, press MODE
repeatedly until the various modes are no longer
displayed.
– You can also press the 9 to cancel your play
mode in playing.
DIGITAL TUNER
2. To prevent sound interference the bass control
options operate exclusively. You cannot combine
the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx
4. GAMESOUND
To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once
or more to select your option.
=Display briefly shows
,
,
or
.
DIGITAL TUNER
1
until you have found optimal reception.
To improve radio reception:
• For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic
antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too
strong.
• For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this
antenna by turning the whole set.
HEAVY !
Take care of your CD Soundmachine.
Grip both handles when you carry or
lift the set.
Programming tuner stations:
1
Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you
play in GAME•AUX source.
You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the
memory, manually or automatically (Autostore).
2
How to MUTE the sound
1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt
sound reproduction instantly.
= Playback continues without sound and the
display flashes
.
Autostore
Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The
set will only program stations which are not in the
memory already.
1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
select the preset number .
2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate
auto store programming.
= Display:
is shown and available
stations are programmed in order of waveband
FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then
be played after all stations are stored
automatically.
2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can:
– press MUTE again;
– adjust the volume controls;
– change to another source.
DIGITAL TUNER (See 3)
Tuning to stations
1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press
SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press
TUNER once on the remote control).
= Display: shows
briefly followed by
waveband, frequency, and preset station
number if already stored.
2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select
your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control)
3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your
stations manually or by automatic search tuning:
Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote
control ) and release button when the frequency in
the display starts running.
= The radio automatically tunes to a station of
sufficient reception. Display shows
during automatic tuning.
4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the
desired station.
• To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or
6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
Programming track numbers
Program in the stop position to select and store your
CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store
any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be
stored in the memory.
1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your
desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or
™)
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the
remote control ¡ or ™).
2. Press PROG.
™ Display: program and the selected track
number
appears briefly.
™ Display :
if no track
selected for programming.
3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired
tracks.
™ Display:
if you try to program more
than 20 tracks.
4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;.
Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG
to add a current track to your program list.
Reviewing the program
In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a
while until the display shows all your stored track
numbers in sequence.
=Display
if no tracks programmed.
Erasing a program
You can erase the program by:
• pressing 9 twice;
=
displayed briefly, and program
disappears.
• pressing STANDBY ON y
• selecting another sound source
• opening the CD door.
@
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
Manual programming
1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to
stations).
2. Press PROG to activate programming.
= Display: program flashes.
1
#3
3
5
4
5
$
5. Repeat the above four steps to store other
stations.
Note : You can erase a preset station by storing
another frequency in its place.
2
4
3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station.
4. Press PROG again to confirm.
= Display shows the preset number, waveband
and the frequency of the preset station.
7
^
8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL
6
%
To listen to a preset station
Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until
the desired preset station is displayed.
GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
0
GAMESOUND (See 8)
PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND:
1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the
GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control)
=Display scrolls :
2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front
of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO
IN.
3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your
game sound option.
,
,
=Display briefly shows
or
.
Connecting other equipment to your system
Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO
OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on
a TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
USB PC LINK
Quick Setup Guide
PC system requirements
– USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP
– Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher
– CD-ROM drive
Installing MusicMatch software
1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the
USB port on your computer. (See B)
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or
more to select USB PC LINK.
3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK
installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This
application software can also be downloaded from
http://www.audio.philips.com.
IMPORTANT!
Please use this customized MusicMatch
software for your USB PC Link application.
Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch
jukebox software first from your PC system (if
available).
X
6
A
B
2 x AAA
USB
EL6095T004 / 8-02
USB PC LINK
USB PC LINK
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
GARANTIA LIMITADA
SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL
Cambio gratis por un año
Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo.
¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION?
Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el
producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando
que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante
de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo
a la mano.
¿QUE CUBRE?
La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que
usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta
fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso
con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un
producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el
período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía
original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del
producto de reemplazo.
¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA?
Su garantía no cubre:
• cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje
del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de
preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con
antena fuera de la unidad.
• reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz
de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u
otra causa no bajo el control de Philips.
• problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de
señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la
unidad.
• un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para
que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue
concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la
reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones.
• daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del
producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por
daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible
que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.
Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin
amparo de derechos de autor.)
• una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o
institucionales.
¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO?
Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con
distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países
donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de
servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo
(aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no
está fácilmente disponible).
ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO…
Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda.
Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039.
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS
EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES…
Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio.
También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y
transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante
de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación:
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía
implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y
aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en
cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto
que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la
duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación
arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.)
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL
CANADA…
Favor de comunicarse con Philips al:
1-800-661-6162 (francófono)
1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante)
(En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda
otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni
implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita
de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips
no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y
perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o
consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada,
aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.)
RECUERDE…
Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del
producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y
enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía.
Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario.
Modelo No.
________________________________
Serie No.
________________________________
4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it
does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows
Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe.
Then perform the following steps:
– Select your desired language from the list.
– Select installer driver.
– Select installer MusicMatch jukebox.
– Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies,
FAQ).
Note:
- You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial
before using it for the first time. Make sure the
volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure
sound output on the set. For optimum performance,
the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to
a low level.
5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create
your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and
dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC
into the playlist window.
Note:
-- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK,
please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)
stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit
www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates .
After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link"
for details on the USB PC LINK operations.
Enable digital CD audio output
Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is
necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows:
For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP
1. Enter the system panel menu and select
'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE',
'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and
'PROPERTIES'.
For Windows 98 SE
2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled).
Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer
to your PC's manual for correct configuration.
Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9)
The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set.
IMPORTANT!
Make sure the MusicMatch software has been
installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the
USB PC Link.
1. Turn on your set and computer .
] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and
not set to minimum / mute.
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once
or more to select USB PC LINK .
3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically
launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX.
] If the audio streaming is detected, the current
track name scrolls .
] If
scrolls for a while, check
the connection between your PC and set.
4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist
is highlighted.
5. Press 2; to start playback.
] The track time appears and the track name
scrolls once.
Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase.
6. If you want to see the track details displayed press
MODE.
During playback,
– Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all
available tracks in the playlist in random order.
– Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat
playback all the tracks in the playlist.
7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or
select another sound sources.
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0)
CD player and disc handling
• If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a
cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set
to repair.
• The lens of the CD player should never be touched!
• Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature
can cause condensation on the lens of your CD
player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not
attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a
warm environment until the moisture evaporates.
• To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the
center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free
cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may
damage the disc.
• Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it.
Safety Information
• Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity,
rain, sand or excessive heat.
• Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning
agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set.
• Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the
system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating.
• Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.
• Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus
(e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles).
If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable
to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center.
CAUTION
WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation.
circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty.
No sound /power
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
•
•
–
•
Volume not adjusted
Adjust the VOLUME
Power cord not securely connected
Connect the AC power cord properly
Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Headphones connected to the set
Disconnect headphones
Electrostatic discharge/interference
Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries
from the battery compartment. Press and hold
STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug /
replace battery supply, and try activating the set again.
When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's
volume is audible and not set to minimum.
When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer
to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output.
CD contains non-audio files
Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to
a CD audio track, instead of the data file
Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode
• Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console
Severe radio hum or noise
– Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or
computer
• Move the set to increase the distance
Remote control does not function properly
–
•
–
•
Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Distance/ angle between the set too large
Reduce the distance/ angle
Poor radio reception
– Weak radio signal
• FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial
indication
– CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized
• Use an unfinalized CD-R(W)
indication
–
•
–
•
–
•
No CD inserted
Inserted a suitable disc
CD badly scratched or dirty
Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance
Laser lens steamed up
Wait until lens has cleared
The CD skips tracks
– CD damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean CD
– shuffle or program is active
• Switch off shuffle / program
is displayed in USB PC LINK
mode for more than 10 sconds
– Check the connection between your PC and the set. If
necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to
USB PC Link for the initial setup required.
• Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the
MusicMatch software is working.
Sound skips during MP3 playback
– MP3 file made at compression level exceeding
320kbps
• Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks
into MP3 format
– Disc damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean disc
Cannot find desired MP3 title
– Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with
unsuitable text characters used
• Make sure the file names are typed in English
text characters an that the MP3 files end with
.mp3
Environmental information
We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3
materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene.
Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized
company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the
disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment.
Philips AZ2558
Tested To Comply
With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Philips Consumer Electronics North America
One Philips Drive
Knoxville TN 37914
Phone: 1-800-531-0039
az2558/17
13/5/03
12:15
Page 1
Return your Warranty Registration card today to
2558
MP3-CD Soundmachine
AZ
AZ
ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to.
Return
your Warranty
Registration Card
within 10 days
EE
CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER
RETURNING THE PRODUCT!
E
S
Philips representatives are ready to help you with
any questions about your new product.We can guide you
through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features.
We want you to start enjoying your new product right away!
RTAN
PO
• So complete and return the Warranty
Registration Card enclosed with your
purchase at once, and take advantage
of these important benefits.
T!
Need help? Call us!
IM
• Once your Philips purchase is registered,
you’re eligible to receive all the privileges
of owning a Philips product.
WH
Y INS
ID
1-800-531-0039
or
Visit us on the web at www.philips.com
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Warranty
Verification
Owner
Confirmation
Model
Registration
Registering your product
within 10 days confirms
your right to maximum
protection under the
terms and conditions of
your Philips warranty.
Your completed Warranty
Registration Card serves
as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss.
Returning your Warranty
Registration Card right
away guarantees you’ll
receive all the information
and special offers which
you qualify for as the
owner of your model.
8.
9.
Know these
safety symbols
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Model No. _______________________
Serial No. ________________________
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material
within your unit may cause
an electrical shock. For the safety of
everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
WARNING: TO PREVENT
The “exclamation point” calls
attention to features for
which you should read the
enclosed literature closely to prevent
operating and maintenance problems.
shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot, and fully insert.
FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO
NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION: To prevent electric
10.
11.
English
Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous
assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit.
• Dès que l’achat de votre appareil
Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à
tous les avantages dont bénéficient les
possesseurs des produits Philips.
Meet Philips at the Internet
• Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte
d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à
votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants.
Français
Español
Vérification
de garantie
Confirmation
de possession
Enregistrement
du modèle
Enregistrez votre produit
dans les 10 jours pour
confirmer votre droit à
une protection maximum
selon les termes et les
conditions de votre
garantie Philips.
Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie
prouve que vous possédez
l’appareil en cas de vol ou
de perte du produit.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès
aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les
informations, les offres et les
bonus auxquels vous avez
droit en tant que possesseur
de ce modèle.
AZ 2558
symboles de
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
sécurite
ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER
LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE
PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A
UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE.
Cet « éclair à pointe de
flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur
de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc
électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun,
nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le
boîtier de ce produit.
Printed in China
Canada
English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les
limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur
le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada.
Le « point d’exclamation »
attire votre attention sur des
sujets risquant de provoquer
des problèmes de fonctionnement et
d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant.
Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures :
– Relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une
3.
Respectez les avertissements.
étagère ou une table de type recom-
4.
Suivez toutes les instructions.
mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un
N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une
meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer
source d’eau.
avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci-
5.
7.
8.
12.
dent corporel si l’équipement se renver-
fon sec.
sait.
N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation.
doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps
fabricant.
prolongée.
N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de
amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur.
d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap-
Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la
pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap-
prise de terre ou prise
pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne
polarisée fournie. Une
fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute.
Prise
polarisée C.A.
IMPORTANT :
Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to
operate this device.
Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima
protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la
garantía de Philips.
Su Tarjeta de Registro de
la Garantía comprueba
que Ud. es el dueño del
aparato en caso de robo
o pérdida del producto.
La devolución inmediata de
su Tarjeta de Registro de la
Garantía le garantiza que
recibirá toda la información
y todas las promociones
especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño
de su modelo.
seguridad
dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est
blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou
dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième,
d’endommager l’appareil :
PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE
LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA
PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN
SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO.
El símbolo del «rayo» indica
que algún material no aislado
dentro de su unidad podría
resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para
la seguridad de todos, favor de no
remover la cubierta del producto.
de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement
El «signo de exclamación» le
llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud.
debe leer la información adjunta
detenidamente para evitar problemas
de funcionamiento y mantenimiento.
WHO IS COVERED?
You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product.
A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach
it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby.
WHAT IS COVERED?
Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product.
For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product
will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered
only for the original warranty period.When the warranty
on the original product expires, the warranty on the
replacement product also expires.
WHAT IS EXCLUDED?
Your warranty does not cover:
• labor charges for installation or setup of the product,
adjustment of customer controls on the product, and
installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the
product.
• product repair and/or part replacement because of
misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause
not within the control of Philips.
• reception problems caused by signal conditions or
cable or antenna systems outside the unit.
• a product that requires modification or adaptation to
enable it to operate in any country other than the
country for which it was designed, manufactured,
approved and/or authorized, or repair of products
damaged by these modifications.
• incidental or consequential damages resulting from the
product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above
exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not
limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted
or not copyrighted.)
• a product used for commercial or institutional purposes.
WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE?
You may exchange the product in all countries where the
product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries
where Philips does not distribute the product, the local
Philips service organization will attempt to provide a
replacement product (although there may be a delay if the
appropriate product is not readily available).
BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE...
Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you
have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039.
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A.,
PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS...
Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship
the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of
purchase enclosed, to the address listed below.
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the
duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do
not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may
last, this limitation may not apply to you.)
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA...
Please contact Philips at:
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking)
(In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied,
including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any
circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or
consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified
of the possibility of such damages.)
REMEMBER...
Please record below the model and serial numbers found
on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty
registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify
you if necessary.
MODEL #
__________________________________
SERIAL #
__________________________________
lines, etc.).
●
Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période.
EL 6475-F003: 02/8
Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II
Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation.
INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8.
9.
10.
11.
MAC5097
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Échange gratuite pendant un an
Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger.
QUI EST COUVERT ?
Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir
bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou
un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que
vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme
preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les
garder tous les deux à portée de main.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ?
La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où
vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette
date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas
sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit
comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit
de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période
non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du
produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de
remplacement est terminée aussi.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ?
La garantie ne couvre pas :
• les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer,
pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer
les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit.
• la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du
mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées
ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par
Philips.
• des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal,
au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité.
• un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations
pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que
le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou
autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par
de telles modifications.
• des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du
produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas
l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est
donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au
cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative,
des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les
lois sur les droits d’auteur).
• un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou
institutionnelles.
OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ?
Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit
est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où
Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service
Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais
il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas
facilement disponible).
Lea estas instrucciones.
Conserve estas instrucciones.
Lea todos los avisos.
Siga todas las instrucciones.
No utilice este aparato cerca del
agua.
Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo
un trapo seco.
No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de
acuerdo con las instrucciones del
fabricante.
No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes
de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores,
estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor.
No anule la
seguridad de la
clavija de corriente
Clavija
polarizada
(ya sea de tipo polarde CA
izado o
con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas
tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la
otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra
tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la
de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más
ancha como la toma de tierra han sido
incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad
personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el
equipo no es compatible con su toma de
corriente, consulte a un electricista para
sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta.
Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más
próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida
del equipo.
Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados
por el fabricante.
12.
Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros,
bases, trípodes, soportes o
mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el
equipo. Cuando utilice un carro,
tenga cuidado al desplazar el
conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco.
13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser
utilizado durante largo tiempo.
14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las
reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre
que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el
cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que
hubieran podido introducirse en su interior,
por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a
ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no
funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera
sufrido algún tipo de caída.
15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para
prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden
ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a
su propiedad o dañar la unidad:
● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad.
● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o
de carbono y alcalinas, etc.).
● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la
unidad durante largo tiempo.
EL 6475-S003: 02/8
Símbolo del equipo Clase II
Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento.
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
– remote control
– USB cable
– video cable
– CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers
– AC power cord
TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1)
1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack.
Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones
are connected to the set.
2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level
(BASS/ MID /HIGH)
3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off.
4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/
TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX
5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control
6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set
7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power.
8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
SEARCH ∞ , §
MP3-CD / CD :
- searches backward or forward ;
- skips to the beginning of a current track/
previous/ later track.
USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a
previous/ later track.
TUNER : - tunes to radio stations
2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
MODE :
- selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat
or shuffle order.
9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the
USB port of your computer
0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode
WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off
EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high
frequencies.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
GARANTIE LIMITÉE
AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE…
Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance.
Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au
1-800-531-0039.
POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES
ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES…
Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange.
Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec
preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous :
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie
implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude
à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie
explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces
ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite,
cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.)
POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AU CANADA…
Veuillez contacter Philips au :
1-800-661-6162 (Francophone)
1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone)
(Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute
autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle
soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite
de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est
pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit
directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents,
quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une
notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.)
RAPPEL IMPORTANT...
Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de
série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez
remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de
garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en
cas de besoin.
Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________
Nº DE SÉRIE
_____________________________
options recommandés par le fabricant.
No. de serie ______________________
sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla
ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha.
des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca-
11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou
No. de modelo ____________________
PRECAUCION: Para evitar
Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec
de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même.
Para uso del cliente:
Escriba abajo el número de serie que se
encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde
esta información para el futuro.
TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA
ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO
EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA
NI A HUMEDAD.
Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels
qu’indiqués sur l’appareil.
●
aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point
7.
ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI-
●
10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter
PRECAUCION
RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA
NO ABRIR
toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des
pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale.
MAC5097
Registro
del modelo
15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter
sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise
chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne
correspondante de la prise et pousser
jusqu’au fond.
• Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida
la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
empacada con su aparato y saque
provecho de estas ventajas importantes.
qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a
subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon
deux lames
DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les
14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel
de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des
prise polarisée est dotée de
N° de série ______________________
CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A
UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR
ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE
ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE.
13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il
Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du
chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches
9.
Utilisez uniquement un meuble
Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif-
plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre
Confirmación
del dueño
simbolos de
One Year Free Exchange
This product must be carried in for an exchange.
EL 6475-E004: 02/8
Conservez ces instructions.
N° de modèle ____________________
Verificación
de la garantía
Conozca estos
●
2.
6.
The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
●
PORTABLE AUDIO
SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE
Cet espace vous est réservé
Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé
à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir.
Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes.
• Una vez que se registre la compra de
su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a
todas las ventajas correspondientes al
dueño de un producto Philips.
●
Lisez ces instructions.
murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien
3140 115 3102.1
15.
1.
AT T E N T I O N
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
14.
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES
6.
Connaissez ces
13.
Use only with the cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer or
sold with the apparatus. When a
cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning
storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent
battery leakage which may result in bodily
injury, property damage, or damage to the
unit:
Install all batteries correctly, + and - as
marked on the unit.
Do not mix batteries (old and new or
carbon and alkaline, etc.).
Remove batteries when the unit is not
used for a long time.
Class II equipment symbol
This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system.
http://www.philips.com
W
12.
English
This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
MAC5097
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near
water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the
manufacturer´s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
Do not defeat
the safety
purpose of the
AC Polarized
polarized or
Plug
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has
two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and
a third grounding prong.The wide blade or
the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being
walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories
specified by the manufacturer.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171
IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS
Supported formats:
• Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session
CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs.
• MP3 music fomats.
• MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable
bit rate.
• 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs.
• Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels
(max. 64 characters).
General information
The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio
Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a
factor up to 10 without losing significant sound
quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of
CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM.
How to get MP3 music
Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or
convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3
encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W).
• To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at
least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files.
• Some encoder software offer an option to protect
music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the
computer which created them. If you burn such
files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this
set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option
in the encoder software before creating the music
files. In this case you are responsible for
adherence to all local or international copyrights.
When burning the MP3-CD
• To avoid problems with playback or missing files,
make sure the file names are typed in English text
characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3
• Use a writing software capable of recording MP3
track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical
order. For details on using the software, refer to
the operating instructions of the software.
• When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you
close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to
read and play your tracks.
CONTROL
PROG
MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the
programmed songs;
TUNER : - programs radio stations.
FM•AM / DISPLAY
FM•AM : - selects waveband
DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions
! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for
external audio appliance.
VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place
@ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door
BACK PANEL (See 1)
# Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception
$ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type
R-20, UM-1 or D-cells
% AC MAINS - inlet for power cord
^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a
TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
REMOTE CONTROL (See 1)
1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source
TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands
USB - selects USB PC LINK
AUX - selects GAME •AUX
2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set
operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if
battery powered)
3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source
or selects the repeat modes in CD source
SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random
order in CD / USB PC LINK source
MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound
4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer
level (BASS/ MID /HIGH)
5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD /
USB PC LINK playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a
MP3-CD / CD track.
TUNER: - tunes to radio stations
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
How to organize MP3 files
You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums
and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song
file sizes.
Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted.
• MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as
numbers in the display.
IMPORTANT!
This set does not play/support the following:
• Empty albums: an empty album is an album that
does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown
in the display.
• Non-supported file formats are skipped. This
means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3
files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not
be played.
• Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC,
Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer
7.0, MusicMatch.
• Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and
Package Writing.
Playing MP3-CD & CD
This CD player plays Audio Discs including
CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs.
• CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not
possible.
1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then
select CD SOURCE.
2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door.
]
is displayed when the CD door is
open.
3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press
down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door.
]Display show
,when reading disc
contents;
]Display :
if no disc inserted/
disc incorrectly inserted.,
]Display :
or
if disc damaged / dirty:.
–
throughout CD operation;
–
throughout MP3-CD operation;
– In CD stop mode: total track number and total
playback time.
POWER SUPPLY
BASIC FUNCTIONS
6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high
frequencies
WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off
GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode
7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY
As a power-saving feature, the system automatically
switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has
reached the end and no control is operated.
POWER SUPPLY
Whenever convenient, use the power supply to
conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the
power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting
batteries.
Switching on and off and selecting function
1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on.
2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your
desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or
GAME•AUX .
3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Batteries (not included) (See 1)
• Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells,
(preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity.
Remote control (See A)
• Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4
(preferably alkaline).
Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the
batteries to burst.
• Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon
zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set.
• When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old
batteries with the new ones.
• Batteries contain chemical substances, so
they should be disposed of properly.
Using AC Power
1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the
type plate located on the bottom of the set,
corresponds to your local power supply. If it does
not, consult your dealer or service center.
2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector,
adjust the selector so that it matches with the
local power supply.
3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the
set is now ready for use.
4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set
from the wall jack.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
–
is shown if you have inserted a
non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc.
Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to
read.
4. Press 2; to start playback.
=Display: Current track number and elapsed track
time during MP3-CD / CD playback.
=If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown.
5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to
resume play.
= Time digits flashes during pause.
6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9.
7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when:
– the CD door is opened
– the CD has reached the end
– you select other sound source.
MP3-CD/ CD text display
During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information:
MP3-CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– track name and elapsed track time;
– album name and elapsed track time;
– album number, track number and elapsed track
time;
– ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display
shows
.
CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback;
– Remaining playback time of current track.
Selecting a different track
• Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡
or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track
number appears in the display.
• If you have selected a track number shortly after
loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will
need to press 2; to start playback.
The type plate is located on the bottom of
the set.
BASIC FUNCTIONS
Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and
the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of
VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory.
Adjusting volume and sound (See 2)
1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control.
= Display shows the volume level
and a
number from 0-32.
2. wOOx
To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or
more to switch on / off.
= wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is
turned on.
Notes:
- wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
- Some discs might be recorded in high modulation,
which causes a distortion at high volume. If this
occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume.
3. EQUALIZER
To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press
EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME
within 3 seconds to adjust each level.
=Display briefly shows
, or
,
level (-5 to +5) or
.
Note:
1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album.
] Display:
if no albums are
available.
Finding a passage within a track
1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote
control 5 or 6).
– The CD is played at high speed and low volume.
– No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/
review.
2. When you recognize the passage you want,
release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on
the remote control 5 or 6)
Note: Searching is only possible within a track.
Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See
4 - 7)
You can select and change the various play modes
before or during playback. The play modes can also be
combined with PROGRAM.
shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are
played in random order
shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program
continuously in random order
repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program
repeat - plays the current track continuously
1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more.
(SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control).
2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position.
]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts
automatically.
3. To select normal playback, press MODE
repeatedly until the various modes are no longer
displayed.
– You can also press the 9 to cancel your play
mode in playing.
DIGITAL TUNER
2. To prevent sound interference the bass control
options operate exclusively. You cannot combine
the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx
4. GAMESOUND
To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once
or more to select your option.
=Display briefly shows
,
,
or
.
DIGITAL TUNER
1
until you have found optimal reception.
To improve radio reception:
• For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic
antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too
strong.
• For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this
antenna by turning the whole set.
HEAVY !
Take care of your CD Soundmachine.
Grip both handles when you carry or
lift the set.
Programming tuner stations:
1
Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you
play in GAME•AUX source.
You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the
memory, manually or automatically (Autostore).
2
How to MUTE the sound
1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt
sound reproduction instantly.
= Playback continues without sound and the
display flashes
.
Autostore
Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The
set will only program stations which are not in the
memory already.
1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
select the preset number .
2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate
auto store programming.
= Display:
is shown and available
stations are programmed in order of waveband
FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then
be played after all stations are stored
automatically.
2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can:
– press MUTE again;
– adjust the volume controls;
– change to another source.
DIGITAL TUNER (See 3)
Tuning to stations
1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press
SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press
TUNER once on the remote control).
= Display: shows
briefly followed by
waveband, frequency, and preset station
number if already stored.
2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select
your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control)
3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your
stations manually or by automatic search tuning:
Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote
control ) and release button when the frequency in
the display starts running.
= The radio automatically tunes to a station of
sufficient reception. Display shows
during automatic tuning.
4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the
desired station.
• To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or
6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
Programming track numbers
Program in the stop position to select and store your
CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store
any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be
stored in the memory.
1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your
desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or
™)
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the
remote control ¡ or ™).
2. Press PROG.
™ Display: program and the selected track
number
appears briefly.
™ Display :
if no track
selected for programming.
3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired
tracks.
™ Display:
if you try to program more
than 20 tracks.
4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;.
Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG
to add a current track to your program list.
Reviewing the program
In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a
while until the display shows all your stored track
numbers in sequence.
=Display
if no tracks programmed.
Erasing a program
You can erase the program by:
• pressing 9 twice;
=
displayed briefly, and program
disappears.
• pressing STANDBY ON y
• selecting another sound source
• opening the CD door.
@
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
Manual programming
1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to
stations).
2. Press PROG to activate programming.
= Display: program flashes.
1
#3
3
5
4
5
$
5. Repeat the above four steps to store other
stations.
Note : You can erase a preset station by storing
another frequency in its place.
2
4
3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station.
4. Press PROG again to confirm.
= Display shows the preset number, waveband
and the frequency of the preset station.
7
^
8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL
6
%
To listen to a preset station
Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until
the desired preset station is displayed.
GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
0
GAMESOUND (See 8)
PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND:
1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the
GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control)
=Display scrolls :
2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front
of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO
IN.
3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your
game sound option.
,
,
=Display briefly shows
or
.
Connecting other equipment to your system
Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO
OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on
a TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
USB PC LINK
Quick Setup Guide
PC system requirements
– USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP
– Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher
– CD-ROM drive
Installing MusicMatch software
1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the
USB port on your computer. (See B)
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or
more to select USB PC LINK.
3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK
installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This
application software can also be downloaded from
http://www.audio.philips.com.
IMPORTANT!
Please use this customized MusicMatch
software for your USB PC Link application.
Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch
jukebox software first from your PC system (if
available).
X
6
A
B
2 x AAA
USB
EL6095T004 / 8-02
USB PC LINK
USB PC LINK
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
GARANTIA LIMITADA
SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL
Cambio gratis por un año
Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo.
¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION?
Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el
producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando
que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante
de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo
a la mano.
¿QUE CUBRE?
La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que
usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta
fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso
con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un
producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el
período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía
original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del
producto de reemplazo.
¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA?
Su garantía no cubre:
• cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje
del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de
preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con
antena fuera de la unidad.
• reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz
de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u
otra causa no bajo el control de Philips.
• problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de
señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la
unidad.
• un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para
que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue
concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la
reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones.
• daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del
producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por
daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible
que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.
Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin
amparo de derechos de autor.)
• una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o
institucionales.
¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO?
Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con
distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países
donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de
servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo
(aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no
está fácilmente disponible).
ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO…
Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda.
Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039.
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS
EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES…
Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio.
También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y
transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante
de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación:
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía
implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y
aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en
cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto
que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la
duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación
arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.)
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL
CANADA…
Favor de comunicarse con Philips al:
1-800-661-6162 (francófono)
1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante)
(En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda
otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni
implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita
de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips
no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y
perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o
consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada,
aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.)
RECUERDE…
Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del
producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y
enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía.
Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario.
Modelo No.
________________________________
Serie No.
________________________________
4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it
does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows
Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe.
Then perform the following steps:
– Select your desired language from the list.
– Select installer driver.
– Select installer MusicMatch jukebox.
– Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies,
FAQ).
Note:
- You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial
before using it for the first time. Make sure the
volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure
sound output on the set. For optimum performance,
the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to
a low level.
5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create
your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and
dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC
into the playlist window.
Note:
-- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK,
please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)
stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit
www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates .
After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link"
for details on the USB PC LINK operations.
Enable digital CD audio output
Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is
necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows:
For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP
1. Enter the system panel menu and select
'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE',
'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and
'PROPERTIES'.
For Windows 98 SE
2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled).
Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer
to your PC's manual for correct configuration.
Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9)
The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set.
IMPORTANT!
Make sure the MusicMatch software has been
installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the
USB PC Link.
1. Turn on your set and computer .
] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and
not set to minimum / mute.
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once
or more to select USB PC LINK .
3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically
launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX.
] If the audio streaming is detected, the current
track name scrolls .
] If
scrolls for a while, check
the connection between your PC and set.
4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist
is highlighted.
5. Press 2; to start playback.
] The track time appears and the track name
scrolls once.
Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase.
6. If you want to see the track details displayed press
MODE.
During playback,
– Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all
available tracks in the playlist in random order.
– Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat
playback all the tracks in the playlist.
7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or
select another sound sources.
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0)
CD player and disc handling
• If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a
cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set
to repair.
• The lens of the CD player should never be touched!
• Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature
can cause condensation on the lens of your CD
player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not
attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a
warm environment until the moisture evaporates.
• To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the
center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free
cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may
damage the disc.
• Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it.
Safety Information
• Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity,
rain, sand or excessive heat.
• Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning
agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set.
• Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the
system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating.
• Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.
• Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus
(e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles).
If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable
to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center.
CAUTION
WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation.
circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty.
No sound /power
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
•
•
–
•
Volume not adjusted
Adjust the VOLUME
Power cord not securely connected
Connect the AC power cord properly
Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Headphones connected to the set
Disconnect headphones
Electrostatic discharge/interference
Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries
from the battery compartment. Press and hold
STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug /
replace battery supply, and try activating the set again.
When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's
volume is audible and not set to minimum.
When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer
to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output.
CD contains non-audio files
Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to
a CD audio track, instead of the data file
Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode
• Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console
Severe radio hum or noise
– Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or
computer
• Move the set to increase the distance
Remote control does not function properly
–
•
–
•
Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Distance/ angle between the set too large
Reduce the distance/ angle
Poor radio reception
– Weak radio signal
• FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial
indication
– CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized
• Use an unfinalized CD-R(W)
indication
–
•
–
•
–
•
No CD inserted
Inserted a suitable disc
CD badly scratched or dirty
Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance
Laser lens steamed up
Wait until lens has cleared
The CD skips tracks
– CD damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean CD
– shuffle or program is active
• Switch off shuffle / program
is displayed in USB PC LINK
mode for more than 10 sconds
– Check the connection between your PC and the set. If
necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to
USB PC Link for the initial setup required.
• Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the
MusicMatch software is working.
Sound skips during MP3 playback
– MP3 file made at compression level exceeding
320kbps
• Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks
into MP3 format
– Disc damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean disc
Cannot find desired MP3 title
– Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with
unsuitable text characters used
• Make sure the file names are typed in English
text characters an that the MP3 files end with
.mp3
Environmental information
We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3
materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene.
Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized
company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the
disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment.
Philips AZ2558
Tested To Comply
With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Philips Consumer Electronics North America
One Philips Drive
Knoxville TN 37914
Phone: 1-800-531-0039
az2558/17
13/5/03
12:15
Page 1
Return your Warranty Registration card today to
2558
MP3-CD Soundmachine
AZ
AZ
ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to.
Return
your Warranty
Registration Card
within 10 days
EE
CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER
RETURNING THE PRODUCT!
E
S
Philips representatives are ready to help you with
any questions about your new product.We can guide you
through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features.
We want you to start enjoying your new product right away!
RTAN
PO
• So complete and return the Warranty
Registration Card enclosed with your
purchase at once, and take advantage
of these important benefits.
T!
Need help? Call us!
IM
• Once your Philips purchase is registered,
you’re eligible to receive all the privileges
of owning a Philips product.
WH
Y INS
ID
1-800-531-0039
or
Visit us on the web at www.philips.com
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Warranty
Verification
Owner
Confirmation
Model
Registration
Registering your product
within 10 days confirms
your right to maximum
protection under the
terms and conditions of
your Philips warranty.
Your completed Warranty
Registration Card serves
as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss.
Returning your Warranty
Registration Card right
away guarantees you’ll
receive all the information
and special offers which
you qualify for as the
owner of your model.
8.
9.
Know these
safety symbols
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Model No. _______________________
Serial No. ________________________
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material
within your unit may cause
an electrical shock. For the safety of
everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
WARNING: TO PREVENT
The “exclamation point” calls
attention to features for
which you should read the
enclosed literature closely to prevent
operating and maintenance problems.
shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot, and fully insert.
FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO
NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION: To prevent electric
10.
11.
English
Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous
assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit.
• Dès que l’achat de votre appareil
Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à
tous les avantages dont bénéficient les
possesseurs des produits Philips.
Meet Philips at the Internet
• Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte
d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à
votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants.
Français
Español
Vérification
de garantie
Confirmation
de possession
Enregistrement
du modèle
Enregistrez votre produit
dans les 10 jours pour
confirmer votre droit à
une protection maximum
selon les termes et les
conditions de votre
garantie Philips.
Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie
prouve que vous possédez
l’appareil en cas de vol ou
de perte du produit.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès
aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les
informations, les offres et les
bonus auxquels vous avez
droit en tant que possesseur
de ce modèle.
AZ 2558
symboles de
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
sécurite
ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER
LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE
PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A
UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE.
Cet « éclair à pointe de
flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur
de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc
électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun,
nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le
boîtier de ce produit.
Printed in China
Canada
English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les
limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur
le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada.
Le « point d’exclamation »
attire votre attention sur des
sujets risquant de provoquer
des problèmes de fonctionnement et
d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant.
Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures :
– Relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une
3.
Respectez les avertissements.
étagère ou une table de type recom-
4.
Suivez toutes les instructions.
mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un
N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une
meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer
source d’eau.
avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci-
5.
7.
8.
12.
dent corporel si l’équipement se renver-
fon sec.
sait.
N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation.
doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps
fabricant.
prolongée.
N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de
amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur.
d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap-
Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la
pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap-
prise de terre ou prise
pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne
polarisée fournie. Une
fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute.
Prise
polarisée C.A.
IMPORTANT :
Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to
operate this device.
Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima
protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la
garantía de Philips.
Su Tarjeta de Registro de
la Garantía comprueba
que Ud. es el dueño del
aparato en caso de robo
o pérdida del producto.
La devolución inmediata de
su Tarjeta de Registro de la
Garantía le garantiza que
recibirá toda la información
y todas las promociones
especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño
de su modelo.
seguridad
dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est
blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou
dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième,
d’endommager l’appareil :
PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE
LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA
PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN
SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO.
El símbolo del «rayo» indica
que algún material no aislado
dentro de su unidad podría
resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para
la seguridad de todos, favor de no
remover la cubierta del producto.
de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement
El «signo de exclamación» le
llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud.
debe leer la información adjunta
detenidamente para evitar problemas
de funcionamiento y mantenimiento.
WHO IS COVERED?
You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product.
A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach
it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby.
WHAT IS COVERED?
Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product.
For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product
will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered
only for the original warranty period.When the warranty
on the original product expires, the warranty on the
replacement product also expires.
WHAT IS EXCLUDED?
Your warranty does not cover:
• labor charges for installation or setup of the product,
adjustment of customer controls on the product, and
installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the
product.
• product repair and/or part replacement because of
misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause
not within the control of Philips.
• reception problems caused by signal conditions or
cable or antenna systems outside the unit.
• a product that requires modification or adaptation to
enable it to operate in any country other than the
country for which it was designed, manufactured,
approved and/or authorized, or repair of products
damaged by these modifications.
• incidental or consequential damages resulting from the
product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above
exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not
limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted
or not copyrighted.)
• a product used for commercial or institutional purposes.
WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE?
You may exchange the product in all countries where the
product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries
where Philips does not distribute the product, the local
Philips service organization will attempt to provide a
replacement product (although there may be a delay if the
appropriate product is not readily available).
BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE...
Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you
have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039.
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A.,
PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS...
Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship
the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of
purchase enclosed, to the address listed below.
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the
duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do
not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may
last, this limitation may not apply to you.)
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA...
Please contact Philips at:
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking)
(In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied,
including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any
circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or
consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified
of the possibility of such damages.)
REMEMBER...
Please record below the model and serial numbers found
on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty
registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify
you if necessary.
MODEL #
__________________________________
SERIAL #
__________________________________
lines, etc.).
●
Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période.
EL 6475-F003: 02/8
Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II
Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation.
INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8.
9.
10.
11.
MAC5097
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Échange gratuite pendant un an
Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger.
QUI EST COUVERT ?
Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir
bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou
un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que
vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme
preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les
garder tous les deux à portée de main.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ?
La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où
vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette
date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas
sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit
comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit
de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période
non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du
produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de
remplacement est terminée aussi.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ?
La garantie ne couvre pas :
• les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer,
pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer
les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit.
• la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du
mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées
ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par
Philips.
• des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal,
au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité.
• un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations
pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que
le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou
autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par
de telles modifications.
• des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du
produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas
l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est
donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au
cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative,
des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les
lois sur les droits d’auteur).
• un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou
institutionnelles.
OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ?
Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit
est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où
Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service
Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais
il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas
facilement disponible).
Lea estas instrucciones.
Conserve estas instrucciones.
Lea todos los avisos.
Siga todas las instrucciones.
No utilice este aparato cerca del
agua.
Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo
un trapo seco.
No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de
acuerdo con las instrucciones del
fabricante.
No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes
de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores,
estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor.
No anule la
seguridad de la
clavija de corriente
Clavija
polarizada
(ya sea de tipo polarde CA
izado o
con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas
tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la
otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra
tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la
de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más
ancha como la toma de tierra han sido
incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad
personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el
equipo no es compatible con su toma de
corriente, consulte a un electricista para
sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta.
Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más
próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida
del equipo.
Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados
por el fabricante.
12.
Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros,
bases, trípodes, soportes o
mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el
equipo. Cuando utilice un carro,
tenga cuidado al desplazar el
conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco.
13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser
utilizado durante largo tiempo.
14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las
reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre
que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el
cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que
hubieran podido introducirse en su interior,
por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a
ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no
funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera
sufrido algún tipo de caída.
15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para
prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden
ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a
su propiedad o dañar la unidad:
● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad.
● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o
de carbono y alcalinas, etc.).
● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la
unidad durante largo tiempo.
EL 6475-S003: 02/8
Símbolo del equipo Clase II
Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento.
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
– remote control
– USB cable
– video cable
– CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers
– AC power cord
TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1)
1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack.
Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones
are connected to the set.
2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level
(BASS/ MID /HIGH)
3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off.
4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/
TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX
5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control
6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set
7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power.
8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
SEARCH ∞ , §
MP3-CD / CD :
- searches backward or forward ;
- skips to the beginning of a current track/
previous/ later track.
USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a
previous/ later track.
TUNER : - tunes to radio stations
2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
MODE :
- selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat
or shuffle order.
9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the
USB port of your computer
0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode
WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off
EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high
frequencies.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
GARANTIE LIMITÉE
AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE…
Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance.
Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au
1-800-531-0039.
POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES
ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES…
Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange.
Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec
preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous :
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie
implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude
à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie
explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces
ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite,
cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.)
POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AU CANADA…
Veuillez contacter Philips au :
1-800-661-6162 (Francophone)
1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone)
(Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute
autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle
soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite
de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est
pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit
directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents,
quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une
notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.)
RAPPEL IMPORTANT...
Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de
série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez
remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de
garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en
cas de besoin.
Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________
Nº DE SÉRIE
_____________________________
options recommandés par le fabricant.
No. de serie ______________________
sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla
ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha.
des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca-
11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou
No. de modelo ____________________
PRECAUCION: Para evitar
Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec
de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même.
Para uso del cliente:
Escriba abajo el número de serie que se
encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde
esta información para el futuro.
TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA
ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO
EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA
NI A HUMEDAD.
Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels
qu’indiqués sur l’appareil.
●
aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point
7.
ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI-
●
10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter
PRECAUCION
RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA
NO ABRIR
toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des
pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale.
MAC5097
Registro
del modelo
15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter
sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise
chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne
correspondante de la prise et pousser
jusqu’au fond.
• Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida
la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
empacada con su aparato y saque
provecho de estas ventajas importantes.
qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a
subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon
deux lames
DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les
14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel
de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des
prise polarisée est dotée de
N° de série ______________________
CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A
UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR
ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE
ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE.
13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il
Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du
chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches
9.
Utilisez uniquement un meuble
Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif-
plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre
Confirmación
del dueño
simbolos de
One Year Free Exchange
This product must be carried in for an exchange.
EL 6475-E004: 02/8
Conservez ces instructions.
N° de modèle ____________________
Verificación
de la garantía
Conozca estos
●
2.
6.
The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
●
PORTABLE AUDIO
SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE
Cet espace vous est réservé
Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé
à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir.
Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes.
• Una vez que se registre la compra de
su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a
todas las ventajas correspondientes al
dueño de un producto Philips.
●
Lisez ces instructions.
murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien
3140 115 3102.1
15.
1.
AT T E N T I O N
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
14.
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES
6.
Connaissez ces
13.
Use only with the cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer or
sold with the apparatus. When a
cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning
storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent
battery leakage which may result in bodily
injury, property damage, or damage to the
unit:
Install all batteries correctly, + and - as
marked on the unit.
Do not mix batteries (old and new or
carbon and alkaline, etc.).
Remove batteries when the unit is not
used for a long time.
Class II equipment symbol
This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system.
http://www.philips.com
W
12.
English
This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
MAC5097
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near
water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the
manufacturer´s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
Do not defeat
the safety
purpose of the
AC Polarized
polarized or
Plug
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has
two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and
a third grounding prong.The wide blade or
the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being
walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories
specified by the manufacturer.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171
IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS
Supported formats:
• Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session
CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs.
• MP3 music fomats.
• MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable
bit rate.
• 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs.
• Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels
(max. 64 characters).
General information
The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio
Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a
factor up to 10 without losing significant sound
quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of
CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM.
How to get MP3 music
Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or
convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3
encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W).
• To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at
least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files.
• Some encoder software offer an option to protect
music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the
computer which created them. If you burn such
files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this
set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option
in the encoder software before creating the music
files. In this case you are responsible for
adherence to all local or international copyrights.
When burning the MP3-CD
• To avoid problems with playback or missing files,
make sure the file names are typed in English text
characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3
• Use a writing software capable of recording MP3
track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical
order. For details on using the software, refer to
the operating instructions of the software.
• When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you
close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to
read and play your tracks.
CONTROL
PROG
MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the
programmed songs;
TUNER : - programs radio stations.
FM•AM / DISPLAY
FM•AM : - selects waveband
DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions
! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for
external audio appliance.
VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place
@ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door
BACK PANEL (See 1)
# Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception
$ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type
R-20, UM-1 or D-cells
% AC MAINS - inlet for power cord
^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a
TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
REMOTE CONTROL (See 1)
1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source
TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands
USB - selects USB PC LINK
AUX - selects GAME •AUX
2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set
operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if
battery powered)
3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source
or selects the repeat modes in CD source
SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random
order in CD / USB PC LINK source
MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound
4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer
level (BASS/ MID /HIGH)
5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD /
USB PC LINK playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a
MP3-CD / CD track.
TUNER: - tunes to radio stations
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
How to organize MP3 files
You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums
and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song
file sizes.
Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted.
• MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as
numbers in the display.
IMPORTANT!
This set does not play/support the following:
• Empty albums: an empty album is an album that
does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown
in the display.
• Non-supported file formats are skipped. This
means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3
files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not
be played.
• Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC,
Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer
7.0, MusicMatch.
• Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and
Package Writing.
Playing MP3-CD & CD
This CD player plays Audio Discs including
CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs.
• CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not
possible.
1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then
select CD SOURCE.
2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door.
]
is displayed when the CD door is
open.
3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press
down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door.
]Display show
,when reading disc
contents;
]Display :
if no disc inserted/
disc incorrectly inserted.,
]Display :
or
if disc damaged / dirty:.
–
throughout CD operation;
–
throughout MP3-CD operation;
– In CD stop mode: total track number and total
playback time.
POWER SUPPLY
BASIC FUNCTIONS
6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high
frequencies
WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off
GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode
7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY
As a power-saving feature, the system automatically
switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has
reached the end and no control is operated.
POWER SUPPLY
Whenever convenient, use the power supply to
conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the
power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting
batteries.
Switching on and off and selecting function
1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on.
2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your
desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or
GAME•AUX .
3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Batteries (not included) (See 1)
• Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells,
(preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity.
Remote control (See A)
• Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4
(preferably alkaline).
Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the
batteries to burst.
• Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon
zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set.
• When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old
batteries with the new ones.
• Batteries contain chemical substances, so
they should be disposed of properly.
Using AC Power
1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the
type plate located on the bottom of the set,
corresponds to your local power supply. If it does
not, consult your dealer or service center.
2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector,
adjust the selector so that it matches with the
local power supply.
3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the
set is now ready for use.
4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set
from the wall jack.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
–
is shown if you have inserted a
non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc.
Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to
read.
4. Press 2; to start playback.
=Display: Current track number and elapsed track
time during MP3-CD / CD playback.
=If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown.
5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to
resume play.
= Time digits flashes during pause.
6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9.
7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when:
– the CD door is opened
– the CD has reached the end
– you select other sound source.
MP3-CD/ CD text display
During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information:
MP3-CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– track name and elapsed track time;
– album name and elapsed track time;
– album number, track number and elapsed track
time;
– ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display
shows
.
CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback;
– Remaining playback time of current track.
Selecting a different track
• Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡
or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track
number appears in the display.
• If you have selected a track number shortly after
loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will
need to press 2; to start playback.
The type plate is located on the bottom of
the set.
BASIC FUNCTIONS
Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and
the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of
VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory.
Adjusting volume and sound (See 2)
1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control.
= Display shows the volume level
and a
number from 0-32.
2. wOOx
To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or
more to switch on / off.
= wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is
turned on.
Notes:
- wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
- Some discs might be recorded in high modulation,
which causes a distortion at high volume. If this
occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume.
3. EQUALIZER
To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press
EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME
within 3 seconds to adjust each level.
=Display briefly shows
, or
,
level (-5 to +5) or
.
Note:
1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album.
] Display:
if no albums are
available.
Finding a passage within a track
1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote
control 5 or 6).
– The CD is played at high speed and low volume.
– No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/
review.
2. When you recognize the passage you want,
release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on
the remote control 5 or 6)
Note: Searching is only possible within a track.
Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See
4 - 7)
You can select and change the various play modes
before or during playback. The play modes can also be
combined with PROGRAM.
shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are
played in random order
shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program
continuously in random order
repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program
repeat - plays the current track continuously
1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more.
(SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control).
2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position.
]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts
automatically.
3. To select normal playback, press MODE
repeatedly until the various modes are no longer
displayed.
– You can also press the 9 to cancel your play
mode in playing.
DIGITAL TUNER
2. To prevent sound interference the bass control
options operate exclusively. You cannot combine
the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx
4. GAMESOUND
To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once
or more to select your option.
=Display briefly shows
,
,
or
.
DIGITAL TUNER
1
until you have found optimal reception.
To improve radio reception:
• For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic
antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too
strong.
• For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this
antenna by turning the whole set.
HEAVY !
Take care of your CD Soundmachine.
Grip both handles when you carry or
lift the set.
Programming tuner stations:
1
Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you
play in GAME•AUX source.
You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the
memory, manually or automatically (Autostore).
2
How to MUTE the sound
1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt
sound reproduction instantly.
= Playback continues without sound and the
display flashes
.
Autostore
Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The
set will only program stations which are not in the
memory already.
1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
select the preset number .
2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate
auto store programming.
= Display:
is shown and available
stations are programmed in order of waveband
FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then
be played after all stations are stored
automatically.
2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can:
– press MUTE again;
– adjust the volume controls;
– change to another source.
DIGITAL TUNER (See 3)
Tuning to stations
1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press
SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press
TUNER once on the remote control).
= Display: shows
briefly followed by
waveband, frequency, and preset station
number if already stored.
2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select
your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control)
3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your
stations manually or by automatic search tuning:
Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote
control ) and release button when the frequency in
the display starts running.
= The radio automatically tunes to a station of
sufficient reception. Display shows
during automatic tuning.
4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the
desired station.
• To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or
6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
Programming track numbers
Program in the stop position to select and store your
CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store
any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be
stored in the memory.
1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your
desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or
™)
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the
remote control ¡ or ™).
2. Press PROG.
™ Display: program and the selected track
number
appears briefly.
™ Display :
if no track
selected for programming.
3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired
tracks.
™ Display:
if you try to program more
than 20 tracks.
4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;.
Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG
to add a current track to your program list.
Reviewing the program
In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a
while until the display shows all your stored track
numbers in sequence.
=Display
if no tracks programmed.
Erasing a program
You can erase the program by:
• pressing 9 twice;
=
displayed briefly, and program
disappears.
• pressing STANDBY ON y
• selecting another sound source
• opening the CD door.
@
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
Manual programming
1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to
stations).
2. Press PROG to activate programming.
= Display: program flashes.
1
#3
3
5
4
5
$
5. Repeat the above four steps to store other
stations.
Note : You can erase a preset station by storing
another frequency in its place.
2
4
3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station.
4. Press PROG again to confirm.
= Display shows the preset number, waveband
and the frequency of the preset station.
7
^
8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL
6
%
To listen to a preset station
Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until
the desired preset station is displayed.
GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
0
GAMESOUND (See 8)
PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND:
1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the
GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control)
=Display scrolls :
2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front
of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO
IN.
3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your
game sound option.
,
,
=Display briefly shows
or
.
Connecting other equipment to your system
Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO
OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on
a TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
USB PC LINK
Quick Setup Guide
PC system requirements
– USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP
– Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher
– CD-ROM drive
Installing MusicMatch software
1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the
USB port on your computer. (See B)
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or
more to select USB PC LINK.
3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK
installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This
application software can also be downloaded from
http://www.audio.philips.com.
IMPORTANT!
Please use this customized MusicMatch
software for your USB PC Link application.
Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch
jukebox software first from your PC system (if
available).
X
6
A
B
2 x AAA
USB
EL6095T004 / 8-02
USB PC LINK
USB PC LINK
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
GARANTIA LIMITADA
SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL
Cambio gratis por un año
Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo.
¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION?
Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el
producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando
que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante
de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo
a la mano.
¿QUE CUBRE?
La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que
usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta
fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso
con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un
producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el
período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía
original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del
producto de reemplazo.
¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA?
Su garantía no cubre:
• cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje
del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de
preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con
antena fuera de la unidad.
• reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz
de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u
otra causa no bajo el control de Philips.
• problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de
señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la
unidad.
• un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para
que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue
concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la
reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones.
• daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del
producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por
daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible
que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.
Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin
amparo de derechos de autor.)
• una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o
institucionales.
¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO?
Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con
distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países
donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de
servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo
(aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no
está fácilmente disponible).
ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO…
Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda.
Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039.
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS
EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES…
Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio.
También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y
transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante
de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación:
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía
implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y
aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en
cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto
que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la
duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación
arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.)
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL
CANADA…
Favor de comunicarse con Philips al:
1-800-661-6162 (francófono)
1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante)
(En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda
otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni
implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita
de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips
no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y
perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o
consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada,
aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.)
RECUERDE…
Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del
producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y
enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía.
Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario.
Modelo No.
________________________________
Serie No.
________________________________
4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it
does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows
Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe.
Then perform the following steps:
– Select your desired language from the list.
– Select installer driver.
– Select installer MusicMatch jukebox.
– Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies,
FAQ).
Note:
- You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial
before using it for the first time. Make sure the
volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure
sound output on the set. For optimum performance,
the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to
a low level.
5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create
your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and
dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC
into the playlist window.
Note:
-- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK,
please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)
stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit
www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates .
After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link"
for details on the USB PC LINK operations.
Enable digital CD audio output
Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is
necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows:
For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP
1. Enter the system panel menu and select
'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE',
'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and
'PROPERTIES'.
For Windows 98 SE
2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled).
Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer
to your PC's manual for correct configuration.
Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9)
The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set.
IMPORTANT!
Make sure the MusicMatch software has been
installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the
USB PC Link.
1. Turn on your set and computer .
] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and
not set to minimum / mute.
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once
or more to select USB PC LINK .
3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically
launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX.
] If the audio streaming is detected, the current
track name scrolls .
] If
scrolls for a while, check
the connection between your PC and set.
4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist
is highlighted.
5. Press 2; to start playback.
] The track time appears and the track name
scrolls once.
Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase.
6. If you want to see the track details displayed press
MODE.
During playback,
– Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all
available tracks in the playlist in random order.
– Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat
playback all the tracks in the playlist.
7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or
select another sound sources.
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0)
CD player and disc handling
• If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a
cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set
to repair.
• The lens of the CD player should never be touched!
• Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature
can cause condensation on the lens of your CD
player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not
attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a
warm environment until the moisture evaporates.
• To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the
center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free
cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may
damage the disc.
• Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it.
Safety Information
• Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity,
rain, sand or excessive heat.
• Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning
agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set.
• Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the
system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating.
• Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.
• Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus
(e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles).
If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable
to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center.
CAUTION
WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation.
circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty.
No sound /power
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
•
•
–
•
Volume not adjusted
Adjust the VOLUME
Power cord not securely connected
Connect the AC power cord properly
Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Headphones connected to the set
Disconnect headphones
Electrostatic discharge/interference
Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries
from the battery compartment. Press and hold
STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug /
replace battery supply, and try activating the set again.
When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's
volume is audible and not set to minimum.
When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer
to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output.
CD contains non-audio files
Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to
a CD audio track, instead of the data file
Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode
• Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console
Severe radio hum or noise
– Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or
computer
• Move the set to increase the distance
Remote control does not function properly
–
•
–
•
Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Distance/ angle between the set too large
Reduce the distance/ angle
Poor radio reception
– Weak radio signal
• FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial
indication
– CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized
• Use an unfinalized CD-R(W)
indication
–
•
–
•
–
•
No CD inserted
Inserted a suitable disc
CD badly scratched or dirty
Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance
Laser lens steamed up
Wait until lens has cleared
The CD skips tracks
– CD damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean CD
– shuffle or program is active
• Switch off shuffle / program
is displayed in USB PC LINK
mode for more than 10 sconds
– Check the connection between your PC and the set. If
necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to
USB PC Link for the initial setup required.
• Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the
MusicMatch software is working.
Sound skips during MP3 playback
– MP3 file made at compression level exceeding
320kbps
• Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks
into MP3 format
– Disc damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean disc
Cannot find desired MP3 title
– Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with
unsuitable text characters used
• Make sure the file names are typed in English
text characters an that the MP3 files end with
.mp3
Environmental information
We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3
materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene.
Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized
company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the
disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment.
Philips AZ2558
Tested To Comply
With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Philips Consumer Electronics North America
One Philips Drive
Knoxville TN 37914
Phone: 1-800-531-0039
az2558/17
13/5/03
12:15
Page 1
Return your Warranty Registration card today to
2558
MP3-CD Soundmachine
AZ
AZ
ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to.
Return
your Warranty
Registration Card
within 10 days
EE
CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER
RETURNING THE PRODUCT!
E
S
Philips representatives are ready to help you with
any questions about your new product.We can guide you
through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features.
We want you to start enjoying your new product right away!
RTAN
PO
• So complete and return the Warranty
Registration Card enclosed with your
purchase at once, and take advantage
of these important benefits.
T!
Need help? Call us!
IM
• Once your Philips purchase is registered,
you’re eligible to receive all the privileges
of owning a Philips product.
WH
Y INS
ID
1-800-531-0039
or
Visit us on the web at www.philips.com
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Warranty
Verification
Owner
Confirmation
Model
Registration
Registering your product
within 10 days confirms
your right to maximum
protection under the
terms and conditions of
your Philips warranty.
Your completed Warranty
Registration Card serves
as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss.
Returning your Warranty
Registration Card right
away guarantees you’ll
receive all the information
and special offers which
you qualify for as the
owner of your model.
8.
9.
Know these
safety symbols
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Model No. _______________________
Serial No. ________________________
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material
within your unit may cause
an electrical shock. For the safety of
everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
WARNING: TO PREVENT
The “exclamation point” calls
attention to features for
which you should read the
enclosed literature closely to prevent
operating and maintenance problems.
shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot, and fully insert.
FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO
NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION: To prevent electric
10.
11.
English
Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous
assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit.
• Dès que l’achat de votre appareil
Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à
tous les avantages dont bénéficient les
possesseurs des produits Philips.
Meet Philips at the Internet
• Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte
d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à
votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants.
Français
Español
Vérification
de garantie
Confirmation
de possession
Enregistrement
du modèle
Enregistrez votre produit
dans les 10 jours pour
confirmer votre droit à
une protection maximum
selon les termes et les
conditions de votre
garantie Philips.
Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie
prouve que vous possédez
l’appareil en cas de vol ou
de perte du produit.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès
aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les
informations, les offres et les
bonus auxquels vous avez
droit en tant que possesseur
de ce modèle.
AZ 2558
symboles de
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
sécurite
ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER
LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE
PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A
UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE.
Cet « éclair à pointe de
flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur
de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc
électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun,
nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le
boîtier de ce produit.
Printed in China
Canada
English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les
limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur
le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada.
Le « point d’exclamation »
attire votre attention sur des
sujets risquant de provoquer
des problèmes de fonctionnement et
d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant.
Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures :
– Relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une
3.
Respectez les avertissements.
étagère ou une table de type recom-
4.
Suivez toutes les instructions.
mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un
N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une
meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer
source d’eau.
avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci-
5.
7.
8.
12.
dent corporel si l’équipement se renver-
fon sec.
sait.
N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation.
doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps
fabricant.
prolongée.
N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de
amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur.
d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap-
Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la
pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap-
prise de terre ou prise
pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne
polarisée fournie. Une
fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute.
Prise
polarisée C.A.
IMPORTANT :
Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to
operate this device.
Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima
protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la
garantía de Philips.
Su Tarjeta de Registro de
la Garantía comprueba
que Ud. es el dueño del
aparato en caso de robo
o pérdida del producto.
La devolución inmediata de
su Tarjeta de Registro de la
Garantía le garantiza que
recibirá toda la información
y todas las promociones
especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño
de su modelo.
seguridad
dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est
blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou
dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième,
d’endommager l’appareil :
PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE
LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA
PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN
SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO.
El símbolo del «rayo» indica
que algún material no aislado
dentro de su unidad podría
resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para
la seguridad de todos, favor de no
remover la cubierta del producto.
de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement
El «signo de exclamación» le
llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud.
debe leer la información adjunta
detenidamente para evitar problemas
de funcionamiento y mantenimiento.
WHO IS COVERED?
You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product.
A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach
it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby.
WHAT IS COVERED?
Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product.
For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product
will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered
only for the original warranty period.When the warranty
on the original product expires, the warranty on the
replacement product also expires.
WHAT IS EXCLUDED?
Your warranty does not cover:
• labor charges for installation or setup of the product,
adjustment of customer controls on the product, and
installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the
product.
• product repair and/or part replacement because of
misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause
not within the control of Philips.
• reception problems caused by signal conditions or
cable or antenna systems outside the unit.
• a product that requires modification or adaptation to
enable it to operate in any country other than the
country for which it was designed, manufactured,
approved and/or authorized, or repair of products
damaged by these modifications.
• incidental or consequential damages resulting from the
product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above
exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not
limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted
or not copyrighted.)
• a product used for commercial or institutional purposes.
WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE?
You may exchange the product in all countries where the
product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries
where Philips does not distribute the product, the local
Philips service organization will attempt to provide a
replacement product (although there may be a delay if the
appropriate product is not readily available).
BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE...
Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you
have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039.
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A.,
PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS...
Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship
the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of
purchase enclosed, to the address listed below.
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the
duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do
not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may
last, this limitation may not apply to you.)
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA...
Please contact Philips at:
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking)
(In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied,
including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any
circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or
consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified
of the possibility of such damages.)
REMEMBER...
Please record below the model and serial numbers found
on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty
registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify
you if necessary.
MODEL #
__________________________________
SERIAL #
__________________________________
lines, etc.).
●
Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période.
EL 6475-F003: 02/8
Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II
Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation.
INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8.
9.
10.
11.
MAC5097
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Échange gratuite pendant un an
Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger.
QUI EST COUVERT ?
Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir
bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou
un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que
vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme
preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les
garder tous les deux à portée de main.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ?
La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où
vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette
date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas
sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit
comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit
de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période
non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du
produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de
remplacement est terminée aussi.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ?
La garantie ne couvre pas :
• les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer,
pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer
les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit.
• la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du
mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées
ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par
Philips.
• des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal,
au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité.
• un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations
pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que
le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou
autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par
de telles modifications.
• des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du
produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas
l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est
donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au
cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative,
des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les
lois sur les droits d’auteur).
• un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou
institutionnelles.
OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ?
Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit
est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où
Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service
Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais
il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas
facilement disponible).
Lea estas instrucciones.
Conserve estas instrucciones.
Lea todos los avisos.
Siga todas las instrucciones.
No utilice este aparato cerca del
agua.
Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo
un trapo seco.
No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de
acuerdo con las instrucciones del
fabricante.
No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes
de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores,
estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor.
No anule la
seguridad de la
clavija de corriente
Clavija
polarizada
(ya sea de tipo polarde CA
izado o
con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas
tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la
otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra
tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la
de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más
ancha como la toma de tierra han sido
incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad
personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el
equipo no es compatible con su toma de
corriente, consulte a un electricista para
sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta.
Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más
próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida
del equipo.
Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados
por el fabricante.
12.
Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros,
bases, trípodes, soportes o
mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el
equipo. Cuando utilice un carro,
tenga cuidado al desplazar el
conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco.
13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser
utilizado durante largo tiempo.
14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las
reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre
que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el
cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que
hubieran podido introducirse en su interior,
por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a
ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no
funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera
sufrido algún tipo de caída.
15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para
prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden
ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a
su propiedad o dañar la unidad:
● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad.
● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o
de carbono y alcalinas, etc.).
● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la
unidad durante largo tiempo.
EL 6475-S003: 02/8
Símbolo del equipo Clase II
Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento.
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
– remote control
– USB cable
– video cable
– CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers
– AC power cord
TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1)
1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack.
Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones
are connected to the set.
2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level
(BASS/ MID /HIGH)
3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off.
4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/
TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX
5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control
6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set
7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power.
8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
SEARCH ∞ , §
MP3-CD / CD :
- searches backward or forward ;
- skips to the beginning of a current track/
previous/ later track.
USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a
previous/ later track.
TUNER : - tunes to radio stations
2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
MODE :
- selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat
or shuffle order.
9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the
USB port of your computer
0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode
WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off
EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high
frequencies.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
GARANTIE LIMITÉE
AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE…
Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance.
Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au
1-800-531-0039.
POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES
ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES…
Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange.
Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec
preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous :
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie
implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude
à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie
explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces
ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite,
cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.)
POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AU CANADA…
Veuillez contacter Philips au :
1-800-661-6162 (Francophone)
1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone)
(Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute
autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle
soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite
de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est
pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit
directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents,
quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une
notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.)
RAPPEL IMPORTANT...
Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de
série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez
remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de
garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en
cas de besoin.
Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________
Nº DE SÉRIE
_____________________________
options recommandés par le fabricant.
No. de serie ______________________
sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla
ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha.
des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca-
11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou
No. de modelo ____________________
PRECAUCION: Para evitar
Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec
de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même.
Para uso del cliente:
Escriba abajo el número de serie que se
encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde
esta información para el futuro.
TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA
ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO
EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA
NI A HUMEDAD.
Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels
qu’indiqués sur l’appareil.
●
aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point
7.
ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI-
●
10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter
PRECAUCION
RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA
NO ABRIR
toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des
pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale.
MAC5097
Registro
del modelo
15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter
sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise
chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne
correspondante de la prise et pousser
jusqu’au fond.
• Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida
la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
empacada con su aparato y saque
provecho de estas ventajas importantes.
qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a
subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon
deux lames
DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les
14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel
de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des
prise polarisée est dotée de
N° de série ______________________
CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A
UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR
ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE
ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE.
13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il
Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du
chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches
9.
Utilisez uniquement un meuble
Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif-
plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre
Confirmación
del dueño
simbolos de
One Year Free Exchange
This product must be carried in for an exchange.
EL 6475-E004: 02/8
Conservez ces instructions.
N° de modèle ____________________
Verificación
de la garantía
Conozca estos
●
2.
6.
The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
●
PORTABLE AUDIO
SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE
Cet espace vous est réservé
Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé
à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir.
Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes.
• Una vez que se registre la compra de
su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a
todas las ventajas correspondientes al
dueño de un producto Philips.
●
Lisez ces instructions.
murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien
3140 115 3102.1
15.
1.
AT T E N T I O N
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
14.
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES
6.
Connaissez ces
13.
Use only with the cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer or
sold with the apparatus. When a
cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning
storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent
battery leakage which may result in bodily
injury, property damage, or damage to the
unit:
Install all batteries correctly, + and - as
marked on the unit.
Do not mix batteries (old and new or
carbon and alkaline, etc.).
Remove batteries when the unit is not
used for a long time.
Class II equipment symbol
This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system.
http://www.philips.com
W
12.
English
This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
MAC5097
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near
water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the
manufacturer´s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
Do not defeat
the safety
purpose of the
AC Polarized
polarized or
Plug
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has
two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and
a third grounding prong.The wide blade or
the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being
walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories
specified by the manufacturer.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171
IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS
Supported formats:
• Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session
CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs.
• MP3 music fomats.
• MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable
bit rate.
• 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs.
• Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels
(max. 64 characters).
General information
The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio
Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a
factor up to 10 without losing significant sound
quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of
CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM.
How to get MP3 music
Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or
convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3
encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W).
• To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at
least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files.
• Some encoder software offer an option to protect
music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the
computer which created them. If you burn such
files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this
set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option
in the encoder software before creating the music
files. In this case you are responsible for
adherence to all local or international copyrights.
When burning the MP3-CD
• To avoid problems with playback or missing files,
make sure the file names are typed in English text
characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3
• Use a writing software capable of recording MP3
track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical
order. For details on using the software, refer to
the operating instructions of the software.
• When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you
close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to
read and play your tracks.
CONTROL
PROG
MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the
programmed songs;
TUNER : - programs radio stations.
FM•AM / DISPLAY
FM•AM : - selects waveband
DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions
! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for
external audio appliance.
VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place
@ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door
BACK PANEL (See 1)
# Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception
$ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type
R-20, UM-1 or D-cells
% AC MAINS - inlet for power cord
^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a
TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
REMOTE CONTROL (See 1)
1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source
TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands
USB - selects USB PC LINK
AUX - selects GAME •AUX
2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set
operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if
battery powered)
3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source
or selects the repeat modes in CD source
SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random
order in CD / USB PC LINK source
MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound
4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer
level (BASS/ MID /HIGH)
5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD /
USB PC LINK playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a
MP3-CD / CD track.
TUNER: - tunes to radio stations
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
How to organize MP3 files
You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums
and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song
file sizes.
Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted.
• MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as
numbers in the display.
IMPORTANT!
This set does not play/support the following:
• Empty albums: an empty album is an album that
does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown
in the display.
• Non-supported file formats are skipped. This
means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3
files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not
be played.
• Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC,
Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer
7.0, MusicMatch.
• Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and
Package Writing.
Playing MP3-CD & CD
This CD player plays Audio Discs including
CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs.
• CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not
possible.
1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then
select CD SOURCE.
2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door.
]
is displayed when the CD door is
open.
3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press
down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door.
]Display show
,when reading disc
contents;
]Display :
if no disc inserted/
disc incorrectly inserted.,
]Display :
or
if disc damaged / dirty:.
–
throughout CD operation;
–
throughout MP3-CD operation;
– In CD stop mode: total track number and total
playback time.
POWER SUPPLY
BASIC FUNCTIONS
6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high
frequencies
WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off
GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode
7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY
As a power-saving feature, the system automatically
switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has
reached the end and no control is operated.
POWER SUPPLY
Whenever convenient, use the power supply to
conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the
power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting
batteries.
Switching on and off and selecting function
1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on.
2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your
desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or
GAME•AUX .
3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Batteries (not included) (See 1)
• Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells,
(preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity.
Remote control (See A)
• Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4
(preferably alkaline).
Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the
batteries to burst.
• Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon
zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set.
• When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old
batteries with the new ones.
• Batteries contain chemical substances, so
they should be disposed of properly.
Using AC Power
1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the
type plate located on the bottom of the set,
corresponds to your local power supply. If it does
not, consult your dealer or service center.
2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector,
adjust the selector so that it matches with the
local power supply.
3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the
set is now ready for use.
4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set
from the wall jack.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
–
is shown if you have inserted a
non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc.
Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to
read.
4. Press 2; to start playback.
=Display: Current track number and elapsed track
time during MP3-CD / CD playback.
=If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown.
5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to
resume play.
= Time digits flashes during pause.
6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9.
7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when:
– the CD door is opened
– the CD has reached the end
– you select other sound source.
MP3-CD/ CD text display
During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information:
MP3-CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– track name and elapsed track time;
– album name and elapsed track time;
– album number, track number and elapsed track
time;
– ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display
shows
.
CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback;
– Remaining playback time of current track.
Selecting a different track
• Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡
or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track
number appears in the display.
• If you have selected a track number shortly after
loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will
need to press 2; to start playback.
The type plate is located on the bottom of
the set.
BASIC FUNCTIONS
Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and
the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of
VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory.
Adjusting volume and sound (See 2)
1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control.
= Display shows the volume level
and a
number from 0-32.
2. wOOx
To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or
more to switch on / off.
= wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is
turned on.
Notes:
- wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
- Some discs might be recorded in high modulation,
which causes a distortion at high volume. If this
occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume.
3. EQUALIZER
To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press
EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME
within 3 seconds to adjust each level.
=Display briefly shows
, or
,
level (-5 to +5) or
.
Note:
1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album.
] Display:
if no albums are
available.
Finding a passage within a track
1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote
control 5 or 6).
– The CD is played at high speed and low volume.
– No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/
review.
2. When you recognize the passage you want,
release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on
the remote control 5 or 6)
Note: Searching is only possible within a track.
Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See
4 - 7)
You can select and change the various play modes
before or during playback. The play modes can also be
combined with PROGRAM.
shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are
played in random order
shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program
continuously in random order
repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program
repeat - plays the current track continuously
1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more.
(SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control).
2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position.
]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts
automatically.
3. To select normal playback, press MODE
repeatedly until the various modes are no longer
displayed.
– You can also press the 9 to cancel your play
mode in playing.
DIGITAL TUNER
2. To prevent sound interference the bass control
options operate exclusively. You cannot combine
the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx
4. GAMESOUND
To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once
or more to select your option.
=Display briefly shows
,
,
or
.
DIGITAL TUNER
1
until you have found optimal reception.
To improve radio reception:
• For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic
antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too
strong.
• For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this
antenna by turning the whole set.
HEAVY !
Take care of your CD Soundmachine.
Grip both handles when you carry or
lift the set.
Programming tuner stations:
1
Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you
play in GAME•AUX source.
You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the
memory, manually or automatically (Autostore).
2
How to MUTE the sound
1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt
sound reproduction instantly.
= Playback continues without sound and the
display flashes
.
Autostore
Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The
set will only program stations which are not in the
memory already.
1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
select the preset number .
2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate
auto store programming.
= Display:
is shown and available
stations are programmed in order of waveband
FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then
be played after all stations are stored
automatically.
2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can:
– press MUTE again;
– adjust the volume controls;
– change to another source.
DIGITAL TUNER (See 3)
Tuning to stations
1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press
SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press
TUNER once on the remote control).
= Display: shows
briefly followed by
waveband, frequency, and preset station
number if already stored.
2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select
your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control)
3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your
stations manually or by automatic search tuning:
Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote
control ) and release button when the frequency in
the display starts running.
= The radio automatically tunes to a station of
sufficient reception. Display shows
during automatic tuning.
4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the
desired station.
• To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or
6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
Programming track numbers
Program in the stop position to select and store your
CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store
any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be
stored in the memory.
1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your
desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or
™)
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the
remote control ¡ or ™).
2. Press PROG.
™ Display: program and the selected track
number
appears briefly.
™ Display :
if no track
selected for programming.
3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired
tracks.
™ Display:
if you try to program more
than 20 tracks.
4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;.
Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG
to add a current track to your program list.
Reviewing the program
In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a
while until the display shows all your stored track
numbers in sequence.
=Display
if no tracks programmed.
Erasing a program
You can erase the program by:
• pressing 9 twice;
=
displayed briefly, and program
disappears.
• pressing STANDBY ON y
• selecting another sound source
• opening the CD door.
@
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
Manual programming
1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to
stations).
2. Press PROG to activate programming.
= Display: program flashes.
1
#3
3
5
4
5
$
5. Repeat the above four steps to store other
stations.
Note : You can erase a preset station by storing
another frequency in its place.
2
4
3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station.
4. Press PROG again to confirm.
= Display shows the preset number, waveband
and the frequency of the preset station.
7
^
8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL
6
%
To listen to a preset station
Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until
the desired preset station is displayed.
GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
0
GAMESOUND (See 8)
PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND:
1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the
GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control)
=Display scrolls :
2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front
of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO
IN.
3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your
game sound option.
,
,
=Display briefly shows
or
.
Connecting other equipment to your system
Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO
OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on
a TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
USB PC LINK
Quick Setup Guide
PC system requirements
– USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP
– Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher
– CD-ROM drive
Installing MusicMatch software
1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the
USB port on your computer. (See B)
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or
more to select USB PC LINK.
3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK
installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This
application software can also be downloaded from
http://www.audio.philips.com.
IMPORTANT!
Please use this customized MusicMatch
software for your USB PC Link application.
Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch
jukebox software first from your PC system (if
available).
X
6
A
B
2 x AAA
USB
EL6095T004 / 8-02
USB PC LINK
USB PC LINK
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
GARANTIA LIMITADA
SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL
Cambio gratis por un año
Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo.
¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION?
Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el
producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando
que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante
de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo
a la mano.
¿QUE CUBRE?
La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que
usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta
fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso
con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un
producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el
período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía
original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del
producto de reemplazo.
¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA?
Su garantía no cubre:
• cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje
del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de
preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con
antena fuera de la unidad.
• reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz
de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u
otra causa no bajo el control de Philips.
• problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de
señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la
unidad.
• un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para
que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue
concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la
reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones.
• daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del
producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por
daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible
que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.
Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin
amparo de derechos de autor.)
• una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o
institucionales.
¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO?
Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con
distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países
donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de
servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo
(aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no
está fácilmente disponible).
ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO…
Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda.
Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039.
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS
EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES…
Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio.
También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y
transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante
de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación:
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía
implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y
aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en
cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto
que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la
duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación
arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.)
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL
CANADA…
Favor de comunicarse con Philips al:
1-800-661-6162 (francófono)
1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante)
(En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda
otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni
implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita
de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips
no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y
perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o
consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada,
aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.)
RECUERDE…
Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del
producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y
enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía.
Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario.
Modelo No.
________________________________
Serie No.
________________________________
4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it
does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows
Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe.
Then perform the following steps:
– Select your desired language from the list.
– Select installer driver.
– Select installer MusicMatch jukebox.
– Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies,
FAQ).
Note:
- You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial
before using it for the first time. Make sure the
volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure
sound output on the set. For optimum performance,
the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to
a low level.
5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create
your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and
dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC
into the playlist window.
Note:
-- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK,
please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)
stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit
www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates .
After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link"
for details on the USB PC LINK operations.
Enable digital CD audio output
Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is
necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows:
For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP
1. Enter the system panel menu and select
'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE',
'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and
'PROPERTIES'.
For Windows 98 SE
2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled).
Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer
to your PC's manual for correct configuration.
Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9)
The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set.
IMPORTANT!
Make sure the MusicMatch software has been
installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the
USB PC Link.
1. Turn on your set and computer .
] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and
not set to minimum / mute.
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once
or more to select USB PC LINK .
3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically
launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX.
] If the audio streaming is detected, the current
track name scrolls .
] If
scrolls for a while, check
the connection between your PC and set.
4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist
is highlighted.
5. Press 2; to start playback.
] The track time appears and the track name
scrolls once.
Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase.
6. If you want to see the track details displayed press
MODE.
During playback,
– Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all
available tracks in the playlist in random order.
– Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat
playback all the tracks in the playlist.
7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or
select another sound sources.
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0)
CD player and disc handling
• If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a
cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set
to repair.
• The lens of the CD player should never be touched!
• Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature
can cause condensation on the lens of your CD
player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not
attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a
warm environment until the moisture evaporates.
• To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the
center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free
cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may
damage the disc.
• Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it.
Safety Information
• Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity,
rain, sand or excessive heat.
• Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning
agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set.
• Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the
system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating.
• Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.
• Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus
(e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles).
If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable
to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center.
CAUTION
WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation.
circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty.
No sound /power
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
•
•
–
•
Volume not adjusted
Adjust the VOLUME
Power cord not securely connected
Connect the AC power cord properly
Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Headphones connected to the set
Disconnect headphones
Electrostatic discharge/interference
Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries
from the battery compartment. Press and hold
STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug /
replace battery supply, and try activating the set again.
When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's
volume is audible and not set to minimum.
When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer
to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output.
CD contains non-audio files
Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to
a CD audio track, instead of the data file
Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode
• Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console
Severe radio hum or noise
– Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or
computer
• Move the set to increase the distance
Remote control does not function properly
–
•
–
•
Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Distance/ angle between the set too large
Reduce the distance/ angle
Poor radio reception
– Weak radio signal
• FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial
indication
– CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized
• Use an unfinalized CD-R(W)
indication
–
•
–
•
–
•
No CD inserted
Inserted a suitable disc
CD badly scratched or dirty
Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance
Laser lens steamed up
Wait until lens has cleared
The CD skips tracks
– CD damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean CD
– shuffle or program is active
• Switch off shuffle / program
is displayed in USB PC LINK
mode for more than 10 sconds
– Check the connection between your PC and the set. If
necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to
USB PC Link for the initial setup required.
• Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the
MusicMatch software is working.
Sound skips during MP3 playback
– MP3 file made at compression level exceeding
320kbps
• Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks
into MP3 format
– Disc damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean disc
Cannot find desired MP3 title
– Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with
unsuitable text characters used
• Make sure the file names are typed in English
text characters an that the MP3 files end with
.mp3
Environmental information
We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3
materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene.
Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized
company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the
disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment.
Philips AZ2558
Tested To Comply
With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Philips Consumer Electronics North America
One Philips Drive
Knoxville TN 37914
Phone: 1-800-531-0039
az2558/17
13/5/03
12:15
Page 1
Return your Warranty Registration card today to
2558
MP3-CD Soundmachine
AZ
AZ
ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to.
Return
your Warranty
Registration Card
within 10 days
EE
CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER
RETURNING THE PRODUCT!
E
S
Philips representatives are ready to help you with
any questions about your new product.We can guide you
through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features.
We want you to start enjoying your new product right away!
RTAN
PO
• So complete and return the Warranty
Registration Card enclosed with your
purchase at once, and take advantage
of these important benefits.
T!
Need help? Call us!
IM
• Once your Philips purchase is registered,
you’re eligible to receive all the privileges
of owning a Philips product.
WH
Y INS
ID
1-800-531-0039
or
Visit us on the web at www.philips.com
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Warranty
Verification
Owner
Confirmation
Model
Registration
Registering your product
within 10 days confirms
your right to maximum
protection under the
terms and conditions of
your Philips warranty.
Your completed Warranty
Registration Card serves
as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss.
Returning your Warranty
Registration Card right
away guarantees you’ll
receive all the information
and special offers which
you qualify for as the
owner of your model.
8.
9.
Know these
safety symbols
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Model No. _______________________
Serial No. ________________________
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material
within your unit may cause
an electrical shock. For the safety of
everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
WARNING: TO PREVENT
The “exclamation point” calls
attention to features for
which you should read the
enclosed literature closely to prevent
operating and maintenance problems.
shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot, and fully insert.
FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO
NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION: To prevent electric
10.
11.
English
Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous
assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit.
• Dès que l’achat de votre appareil
Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à
tous les avantages dont bénéficient les
possesseurs des produits Philips.
Meet Philips at the Internet
• Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte
d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à
votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants.
Français
Español
Vérification
de garantie
Confirmation
de possession
Enregistrement
du modèle
Enregistrez votre produit
dans les 10 jours pour
confirmer votre droit à
une protection maximum
selon les termes et les
conditions de votre
garantie Philips.
Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie
prouve que vous possédez
l’appareil en cas de vol ou
de perte du produit.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès
aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les
informations, les offres et les
bonus auxquels vous avez
droit en tant que possesseur
de ce modèle.
AZ 2558
symboles de
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
sécurite
ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER
LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE
PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A
UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE.
Cet « éclair à pointe de
flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur
de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc
électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun,
nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le
boîtier de ce produit.
Printed in China
Canada
English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les
limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur
le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada.
Le « point d’exclamation »
attire votre attention sur des
sujets risquant de provoquer
des problèmes de fonctionnement et
d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant.
Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures :
– Relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une
3.
Respectez les avertissements.
étagère ou une table de type recom-
4.
Suivez toutes les instructions.
mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un
N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une
meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer
source d’eau.
avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci-
5.
7.
8.
12.
dent corporel si l’équipement se renver-
fon sec.
sait.
N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation.
doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps
fabricant.
prolongée.
N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de
amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur.
d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap-
Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la
pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap-
prise de terre ou prise
pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne
polarisée fournie. Une
fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute.
Prise
polarisée C.A.
IMPORTANT :
Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to
operate this device.
Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima
protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la
garantía de Philips.
Su Tarjeta de Registro de
la Garantía comprueba
que Ud. es el dueño del
aparato en caso de robo
o pérdida del producto.
La devolución inmediata de
su Tarjeta de Registro de la
Garantía le garantiza que
recibirá toda la información
y todas las promociones
especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño
de su modelo.
seguridad
dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est
blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou
dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième,
d’endommager l’appareil :
PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE
LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA
PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN
SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO.
El símbolo del «rayo» indica
que algún material no aislado
dentro de su unidad podría
resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para
la seguridad de todos, favor de no
remover la cubierta del producto.
de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement
El «signo de exclamación» le
llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud.
debe leer la información adjunta
detenidamente para evitar problemas
de funcionamiento y mantenimiento.
WHO IS COVERED?
You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product.
A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach
it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby.
WHAT IS COVERED?
Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product.
For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product
will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered
only for the original warranty period.When the warranty
on the original product expires, the warranty on the
replacement product also expires.
WHAT IS EXCLUDED?
Your warranty does not cover:
• labor charges for installation or setup of the product,
adjustment of customer controls on the product, and
installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the
product.
• product repair and/or part replacement because of
misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause
not within the control of Philips.
• reception problems caused by signal conditions or
cable or antenna systems outside the unit.
• a product that requires modification or adaptation to
enable it to operate in any country other than the
country for which it was designed, manufactured,
approved and/or authorized, or repair of products
damaged by these modifications.
• incidental or consequential damages resulting from the
product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above
exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not
limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted
or not copyrighted.)
• a product used for commercial or institutional purposes.
WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE?
You may exchange the product in all countries where the
product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries
where Philips does not distribute the product, the local
Philips service organization will attempt to provide a
replacement product (although there may be a delay if the
appropriate product is not readily available).
BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE...
Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you
have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039.
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A.,
PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS...
Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship
the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of
purchase enclosed, to the address listed below.
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the
duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do
not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may
last, this limitation may not apply to you.)
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA...
Please contact Philips at:
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking)
(In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied,
including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any
circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or
consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified
of the possibility of such damages.)
REMEMBER...
Please record below the model and serial numbers found
on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty
registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify
you if necessary.
MODEL #
__________________________________
SERIAL #
__________________________________
lines, etc.).
●
Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période.
EL 6475-F003: 02/8
Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II
Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation.
INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8.
9.
10.
11.
MAC5097
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Échange gratuite pendant un an
Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger.
QUI EST COUVERT ?
Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir
bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou
un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que
vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme
preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les
garder tous les deux à portée de main.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ?
La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où
vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette
date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas
sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit
comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit
de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période
non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du
produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de
remplacement est terminée aussi.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ?
La garantie ne couvre pas :
• les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer,
pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer
les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit.
• la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du
mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées
ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par
Philips.
• des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal,
au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité.
• un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations
pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que
le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou
autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par
de telles modifications.
• des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du
produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas
l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est
donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au
cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative,
des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les
lois sur les droits d’auteur).
• un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou
institutionnelles.
OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ?
Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit
est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où
Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service
Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais
il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas
facilement disponible).
Lea estas instrucciones.
Conserve estas instrucciones.
Lea todos los avisos.
Siga todas las instrucciones.
No utilice este aparato cerca del
agua.
Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo
un trapo seco.
No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de
acuerdo con las instrucciones del
fabricante.
No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes
de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores,
estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor.
No anule la
seguridad de la
clavija de corriente
Clavija
polarizada
(ya sea de tipo polarde CA
izado o
con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas
tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la
otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra
tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la
de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más
ancha como la toma de tierra han sido
incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad
personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el
equipo no es compatible con su toma de
corriente, consulte a un electricista para
sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta.
Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más
próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida
del equipo.
Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados
por el fabricante.
12.
Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros,
bases, trípodes, soportes o
mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el
equipo. Cuando utilice un carro,
tenga cuidado al desplazar el
conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco.
13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser
utilizado durante largo tiempo.
14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las
reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre
que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el
cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que
hubieran podido introducirse en su interior,
por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a
ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no
funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera
sufrido algún tipo de caída.
15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para
prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden
ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a
su propiedad o dañar la unidad:
● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad.
● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o
de carbono y alcalinas, etc.).
● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la
unidad durante largo tiempo.
EL 6475-S003: 02/8
Símbolo del equipo Clase II
Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento.
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
– remote control
– USB cable
– video cable
– CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers
– AC power cord
TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1)
1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack.
Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones
are connected to the set.
2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level
(BASS/ MID /HIGH)
3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off.
4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/
TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX
5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control
6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set
7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power.
8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
SEARCH ∞ , §
MP3-CD / CD :
- searches backward or forward ;
- skips to the beginning of a current track/
previous/ later track.
USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a
previous/ later track.
TUNER : - tunes to radio stations
2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
MODE :
- selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat
or shuffle order.
9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the
USB port of your computer
0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode
WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off
EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high
frequencies.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
GARANTIE LIMITÉE
AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE…
Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance.
Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au
1-800-531-0039.
POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES
ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES…
Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange.
Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec
preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous :
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie
implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude
à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie
explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces
ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite,
cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.)
POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AU CANADA…
Veuillez contacter Philips au :
1-800-661-6162 (Francophone)
1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone)
(Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute
autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle
soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite
de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est
pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit
directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents,
quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une
notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.)
RAPPEL IMPORTANT...
Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de
série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez
remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de
garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en
cas de besoin.
Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________
Nº DE SÉRIE
_____________________________
options recommandés par le fabricant.
No. de serie ______________________
sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla
ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha.
des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca-
11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou
No. de modelo ____________________
PRECAUCION: Para evitar
Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec
de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même.
Para uso del cliente:
Escriba abajo el número de serie que se
encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde
esta información para el futuro.
TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA
ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO
EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA
NI A HUMEDAD.
Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels
qu’indiqués sur l’appareil.
●
aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point
7.
ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI-
●
10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter
PRECAUCION
RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA
NO ABRIR
toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des
pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale.
MAC5097
Registro
del modelo
15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter
sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise
chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne
correspondante de la prise et pousser
jusqu’au fond.
• Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida
la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
empacada con su aparato y saque
provecho de estas ventajas importantes.
qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a
subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon
deux lames
DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les
14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel
de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des
prise polarisée est dotée de
N° de série ______________________
CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A
UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR
ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE
ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE.
13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il
Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du
chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches
9.
Utilisez uniquement un meuble
Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif-
plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre
Confirmación
del dueño
simbolos de
One Year Free Exchange
This product must be carried in for an exchange.
EL 6475-E004: 02/8
Conservez ces instructions.
N° de modèle ____________________
Verificación
de la garantía
Conozca estos
●
2.
6.
The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
●
PORTABLE AUDIO
SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE
Cet espace vous est réservé
Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé
à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir.
Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes.
• Una vez que se registre la compra de
su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a
todas las ventajas correspondientes al
dueño de un producto Philips.
●
Lisez ces instructions.
murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien
3140 115 3102.1
15.
1.
AT T E N T I O N
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
14.
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES
6.
Connaissez ces
13.
Use only with the cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer or
sold with the apparatus. When a
cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning
storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent
battery leakage which may result in bodily
injury, property damage, or damage to the
unit:
Install all batteries correctly, + and - as
marked on the unit.
Do not mix batteries (old and new or
carbon and alkaline, etc.).
Remove batteries when the unit is not
used for a long time.
Class II equipment symbol
This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system.
http://www.philips.com
W
12.
English
This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
MAC5097
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near
water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the
manufacturer´s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
Do not defeat
the safety
purpose of the
AC Polarized
polarized or
Plug
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has
two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and
a third grounding prong.The wide blade or
the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being
walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories
specified by the manufacturer.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171
IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS
Supported formats:
• Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session
CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs.
• MP3 music fomats.
• MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable
bit rate.
• 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs.
• Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels
(max. 64 characters).
General information
The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio
Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a
factor up to 10 without losing significant sound
quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of
CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM.
How to get MP3 music
Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or
convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3
encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W).
• To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at
least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files.
• Some encoder software offer an option to protect
music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the
computer which created them. If you burn such
files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this
set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option
in the encoder software before creating the music
files. In this case you are responsible for
adherence to all local or international copyrights.
When burning the MP3-CD
• To avoid problems with playback or missing files,
make sure the file names are typed in English text
characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3
• Use a writing software capable of recording MP3
track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical
order. For details on using the software, refer to
the operating instructions of the software.
• When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you
close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to
read and play your tracks.
CONTROL
PROG
MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the
programmed songs;
TUNER : - programs radio stations.
FM•AM / DISPLAY
FM•AM : - selects waveband
DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions
! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for
external audio appliance.
VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place
@ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door
BACK PANEL (See 1)
# Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception
$ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type
R-20, UM-1 or D-cells
% AC MAINS - inlet for power cord
^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a
TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
REMOTE CONTROL (See 1)
1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source
TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands
USB - selects USB PC LINK
AUX - selects GAME •AUX
2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set
operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if
battery powered)
3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source
or selects the repeat modes in CD source
SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random
order in CD / USB PC LINK source
MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound
4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer
level (BASS/ MID /HIGH)
5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD /
USB PC LINK playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a
MP3-CD / CD track.
TUNER: - tunes to radio stations
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
How to organize MP3 files
You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums
and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song
file sizes.
Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted.
• MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as
numbers in the display.
IMPORTANT!
This set does not play/support the following:
• Empty albums: an empty album is an album that
does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown
in the display.
• Non-supported file formats are skipped. This
means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3
files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not
be played.
• Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC,
Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer
7.0, MusicMatch.
• Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and
Package Writing.
Playing MP3-CD & CD
This CD player plays Audio Discs including
CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs.
• CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not
possible.
1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then
select CD SOURCE.
2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door.
]
is displayed when the CD door is
open.
3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press
down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door.
]Display show
,when reading disc
contents;
]Display :
if no disc inserted/
disc incorrectly inserted.,
]Display :
or
if disc damaged / dirty:.
–
throughout CD operation;
–
throughout MP3-CD operation;
– In CD stop mode: total track number and total
playback time.
POWER SUPPLY
BASIC FUNCTIONS
6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high
frequencies
WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off
GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode
7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY
As a power-saving feature, the system automatically
switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has
reached the end and no control is operated.
POWER SUPPLY
Whenever convenient, use the power supply to
conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the
power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting
batteries.
Switching on and off and selecting function
1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on.
2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your
desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or
GAME•AUX .
3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Batteries (not included) (See 1)
• Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells,
(preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity.
Remote control (See A)
• Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4
(preferably alkaline).
Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the
batteries to burst.
• Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon
zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set.
• When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old
batteries with the new ones.
• Batteries contain chemical substances, so
they should be disposed of properly.
Using AC Power
1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the
type plate located on the bottom of the set,
corresponds to your local power supply. If it does
not, consult your dealer or service center.
2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector,
adjust the selector so that it matches with the
local power supply.
3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the
set is now ready for use.
4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set
from the wall jack.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
–
is shown if you have inserted a
non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc.
Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to
read.
4. Press 2; to start playback.
=Display: Current track number and elapsed track
time during MP3-CD / CD playback.
=If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown.
5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to
resume play.
= Time digits flashes during pause.
6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9.
7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when:
– the CD door is opened
– the CD has reached the end
– you select other sound source.
MP3-CD/ CD text display
During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information:
MP3-CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– track name and elapsed track time;
– album name and elapsed track time;
– album number, track number and elapsed track
time;
– ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display
shows
.
CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback;
– Remaining playback time of current track.
Selecting a different track
• Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡
or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track
number appears in the display.
• If you have selected a track number shortly after
loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will
need to press 2; to start playback.
The type plate is located on the bottom of
the set.
BASIC FUNCTIONS
Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and
the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of
VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory.
Adjusting volume and sound (See 2)
1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control.
= Display shows the volume level
and a
number from 0-32.
2. wOOx
To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or
more to switch on / off.
= wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is
turned on.
Notes:
- wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
- Some discs might be recorded in high modulation,
which causes a distortion at high volume. If this
occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume.
3. EQUALIZER
To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press
EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME
within 3 seconds to adjust each level.
=Display briefly shows
, or
,
level (-5 to +5) or
.
Note:
1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album.
] Display:
if no albums are
available.
Finding a passage within a track
1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote
control 5 or 6).
– The CD is played at high speed and low volume.
– No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/
review.
2. When you recognize the passage you want,
release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on
the remote control 5 or 6)
Note: Searching is only possible within a track.
Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See
4 - 7)
You can select and change the various play modes
before or during playback. The play modes can also be
combined with PROGRAM.
shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are
played in random order
shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program
continuously in random order
repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program
repeat - plays the current track continuously
1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more.
(SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control).
2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position.
]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts
automatically.
3. To select normal playback, press MODE
repeatedly until the various modes are no longer
displayed.
– You can also press the 9 to cancel your play
mode in playing.
DIGITAL TUNER
2. To prevent sound interference the bass control
options operate exclusively. You cannot combine
the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx
4. GAMESOUND
To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once
or more to select your option.
=Display briefly shows
,
,
or
.
DIGITAL TUNER
1
until you have found optimal reception.
To improve radio reception:
• For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic
antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too
strong.
• For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this
antenna by turning the whole set.
HEAVY !
Take care of your CD Soundmachine.
Grip both handles when you carry or
lift the set.
Programming tuner stations:
1
Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you
play in GAME•AUX source.
You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the
memory, manually or automatically (Autostore).
2
How to MUTE the sound
1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt
sound reproduction instantly.
= Playback continues without sound and the
display flashes
.
Autostore
Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The
set will only program stations which are not in the
memory already.
1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
select the preset number .
2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate
auto store programming.
= Display:
is shown and available
stations are programmed in order of waveband
FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then
be played after all stations are stored
automatically.
2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can:
– press MUTE again;
– adjust the volume controls;
– change to another source.
DIGITAL TUNER (See 3)
Tuning to stations
1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press
SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press
TUNER once on the remote control).
= Display: shows
briefly followed by
waveband, frequency, and preset station
number if already stored.
2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select
your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control)
3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your
stations manually or by automatic search tuning:
Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote
control ) and release button when the frequency in
the display starts running.
= The radio automatically tunes to a station of
sufficient reception. Display shows
during automatic tuning.
4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the
desired station.
• To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or
6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
Programming track numbers
Program in the stop position to select and store your
CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store
any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be
stored in the memory.
1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your
desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or
™)
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the
remote control ¡ or ™).
2. Press PROG.
™ Display: program and the selected track
number
appears briefly.
™ Display :
if no track
selected for programming.
3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired
tracks.
™ Display:
if you try to program more
than 20 tracks.
4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;.
Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG
to add a current track to your program list.
Reviewing the program
In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a
while until the display shows all your stored track
numbers in sequence.
=Display
if no tracks programmed.
Erasing a program
You can erase the program by:
• pressing 9 twice;
=
displayed briefly, and program
disappears.
• pressing STANDBY ON y
• selecting another sound source
• opening the CD door.
@
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
Manual programming
1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to
stations).
2. Press PROG to activate programming.
= Display: program flashes.
1
#3
3
5
4
5
$
5. Repeat the above four steps to store other
stations.
Note : You can erase a preset station by storing
another frequency in its place.
2
4
3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station.
4. Press PROG again to confirm.
= Display shows the preset number, waveband
and the frequency of the preset station.
7
^
8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL
6
%
To listen to a preset station
Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until
the desired preset station is displayed.
GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
0
GAMESOUND (See 8)
PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND:
1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the
GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control)
=Display scrolls :
2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front
of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO
IN.
3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your
game sound option.
,
,
=Display briefly shows
or
.
Connecting other equipment to your system
Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO
OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on
a TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
USB PC LINK
Quick Setup Guide
PC system requirements
– USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP
– Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher
– CD-ROM drive
Installing MusicMatch software
1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the
USB port on your computer. (See B)
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or
more to select USB PC LINK.
3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK
installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This
application software can also be downloaded from
http://www.audio.philips.com.
IMPORTANT!
Please use this customized MusicMatch
software for your USB PC Link application.
Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch
jukebox software first from your PC system (if
available).
X
6
A
B
2 x AAA
USB
EL6095T004 / 8-02
USB PC LINK
USB PC LINK
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
GARANTIA LIMITADA
SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL
Cambio gratis por un año
Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo.
¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION?
Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el
producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando
que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante
de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo
a la mano.
¿QUE CUBRE?
La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que
usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta
fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso
con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un
producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el
período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía
original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del
producto de reemplazo.
¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA?
Su garantía no cubre:
• cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje
del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de
preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con
antena fuera de la unidad.
• reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz
de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u
otra causa no bajo el control de Philips.
• problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de
señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la
unidad.
• un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para
que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue
concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la
reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones.
• daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del
producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por
daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible
que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.
Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin
amparo de derechos de autor.)
• una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o
institucionales.
¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO?
Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con
distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países
donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de
servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo
(aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no
está fácilmente disponible).
ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO…
Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda.
Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039.
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS
EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES…
Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio.
También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y
transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante
de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación:
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía
implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y
aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en
cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto
que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la
duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación
arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.)
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL
CANADA…
Favor de comunicarse con Philips al:
1-800-661-6162 (francófono)
1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante)
(En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda
otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni
implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita
de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips
no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y
perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o
consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada,
aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.)
RECUERDE…
Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del
producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y
enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía.
Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario.
Modelo No.
________________________________
Serie No.
________________________________
4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it
does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows
Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe.
Then perform the following steps:
– Select your desired language from the list.
– Select installer driver.
– Select installer MusicMatch jukebox.
– Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies,
FAQ).
Note:
- You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial
before using it for the first time. Make sure the
volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure
sound output on the set. For optimum performance,
the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to
a low level.
5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create
your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and
dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC
into the playlist window.
Note:
-- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK,
please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)
stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit
www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates .
After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link"
for details on the USB PC LINK operations.
Enable digital CD audio output
Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is
necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows:
For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP
1. Enter the system panel menu and select
'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE',
'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and
'PROPERTIES'.
For Windows 98 SE
2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled).
Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer
to your PC's manual for correct configuration.
Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9)
The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set.
IMPORTANT!
Make sure the MusicMatch software has been
installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the
USB PC Link.
1. Turn on your set and computer .
] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and
not set to minimum / mute.
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once
or more to select USB PC LINK .
3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically
launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX.
] If the audio streaming is detected, the current
track name scrolls .
] If
scrolls for a while, check
the connection between your PC and set.
4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist
is highlighted.
5. Press 2; to start playback.
] The track time appears and the track name
scrolls once.
Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase.
6. If you want to see the track details displayed press
MODE.
During playback,
– Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all
available tracks in the playlist in random order.
– Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat
playback all the tracks in the playlist.
7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or
select another sound sources.
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0)
CD player and disc handling
• If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a
cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set
to repair.
• The lens of the CD player should never be touched!
• Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature
can cause condensation on the lens of your CD
player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not
attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a
warm environment until the moisture evaporates.
• To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the
center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free
cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may
damage the disc.
• Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it.
Safety Information
• Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity,
rain, sand or excessive heat.
• Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning
agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set.
• Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the
system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating.
• Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.
• Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus
(e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles).
If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable
to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center.
CAUTION
WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation.
circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty.
No sound /power
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
•
•
–
•
Volume not adjusted
Adjust the VOLUME
Power cord not securely connected
Connect the AC power cord properly
Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Headphones connected to the set
Disconnect headphones
Electrostatic discharge/interference
Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries
from the battery compartment. Press and hold
STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug /
replace battery supply, and try activating the set again.
When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's
volume is audible and not set to minimum.
When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer
to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output.
CD contains non-audio files
Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to
a CD audio track, instead of the data file
Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode
• Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console
Severe radio hum or noise
– Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or
computer
• Move the set to increase the distance
Remote control does not function properly
–
•
–
•
Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Distance/ angle between the set too large
Reduce the distance/ angle
Poor radio reception
– Weak radio signal
• FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial
indication
– CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized
• Use an unfinalized CD-R(W)
indication
–
•
–
•
–
•
No CD inserted
Inserted a suitable disc
CD badly scratched or dirty
Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance
Laser lens steamed up
Wait until lens has cleared
The CD skips tracks
– CD damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean CD
– shuffle or program is active
• Switch off shuffle / program
is displayed in USB PC LINK
mode for more than 10 sconds
– Check the connection between your PC and the set. If
necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to
USB PC Link for the initial setup required.
• Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the
MusicMatch software is working.
Sound skips during MP3 playback
– MP3 file made at compression level exceeding
320kbps
• Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks
into MP3 format
– Disc damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean disc
Cannot find desired MP3 title
– Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with
unsuitable text characters used
• Make sure the file names are typed in English
text characters an that the MP3 files end with
.mp3
Environmental information
We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3
materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene.
Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized
company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the
disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment.
Philips AZ2558
Tested To Comply
With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Philips Consumer Electronics North America
One Philips Drive
Knoxville TN 37914
Phone: 1-800-531-0039
az2558/17
13/5/03
12:15
Page 1
Return your Warranty Registration card today to
2558
MP3-CD Soundmachine
AZ
AZ
ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to.
Return
your Warranty
Registration Card
within 10 days
EE
CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER
RETURNING THE PRODUCT!
E
S
Philips representatives are ready to help you with
any questions about your new product.We can guide you
through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features.
We want you to start enjoying your new product right away!
RTAN
PO
• So complete and return the Warranty
Registration Card enclosed with your
purchase at once, and take advantage
of these important benefits.
T!
Need help? Call us!
IM
• Once your Philips purchase is registered,
you’re eligible to receive all the privileges
of owning a Philips product.
WH
Y INS
ID
1-800-531-0039
or
Visit us on the web at www.philips.com
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Warranty
Verification
Owner
Confirmation
Model
Registration
Registering your product
within 10 days confirms
your right to maximum
protection under the
terms and conditions of
your Philips warranty.
Your completed Warranty
Registration Card serves
as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss.
Returning your Warranty
Registration Card right
away guarantees you’ll
receive all the information
and special offers which
you qualify for as the
owner of your model.
8.
9.
Know these
safety symbols
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Model No. _______________________
Serial No. ________________________
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material
within your unit may cause
an electrical shock. For the safety of
everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
WARNING: TO PREVENT
The “exclamation point” calls
attention to features for
which you should read the
enclosed literature closely to prevent
operating and maintenance problems.
shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot, and fully insert.
FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO
NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION: To prevent electric
10.
11.
English
Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous
assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit.
• Dès que l’achat de votre appareil
Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à
tous les avantages dont bénéficient les
possesseurs des produits Philips.
Meet Philips at the Internet
• Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte
d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à
votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants.
Français
Español
Vérification
de garantie
Confirmation
de possession
Enregistrement
du modèle
Enregistrez votre produit
dans les 10 jours pour
confirmer votre droit à
une protection maximum
selon les termes et les
conditions de votre
garantie Philips.
Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie
prouve que vous possédez
l’appareil en cas de vol ou
de perte du produit.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès
aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les
informations, les offres et les
bonus auxquels vous avez
droit en tant que possesseur
de ce modèle.
AZ 2558
symboles de
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
sécurite
ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER
LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE
PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A
UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE.
Cet « éclair à pointe de
flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur
de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc
électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun,
nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le
boîtier de ce produit.
Printed in China
Canada
English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les
limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur
le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada.
Le « point d’exclamation »
attire votre attention sur des
sujets risquant de provoquer
des problèmes de fonctionnement et
d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant.
Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures :
– Relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une
3.
Respectez les avertissements.
étagère ou une table de type recom-
4.
Suivez toutes les instructions.
mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un
N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une
meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer
source d’eau.
avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci-
5.
7.
8.
12.
dent corporel si l’équipement se renver-
fon sec.
sait.
N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation.
doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps
fabricant.
prolongée.
N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de
amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur.
d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap-
Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la
pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap-
prise de terre ou prise
pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne
polarisée fournie. Une
fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute.
Prise
polarisée C.A.
IMPORTANT :
Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to
operate this device.
Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima
protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la
garantía de Philips.
Su Tarjeta de Registro de
la Garantía comprueba
que Ud. es el dueño del
aparato en caso de robo
o pérdida del producto.
La devolución inmediata de
su Tarjeta de Registro de la
Garantía le garantiza que
recibirá toda la información
y todas las promociones
especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño
de su modelo.
seguridad
dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est
blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou
dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième,
d’endommager l’appareil :
PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE
LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA
PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN
SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO.
El símbolo del «rayo» indica
que algún material no aislado
dentro de su unidad podría
resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para
la seguridad de todos, favor de no
remover la cubierta del producto.
de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement
El «signo de exclamación» le
llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud.
debe leer la información adjunta
detenidamente para evitar problemas
de funcionamiento y mantenimiento.
WHO IS COVERED?
You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product.
A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach
it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby.
WHAT IS COVERED?
Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product.
For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product
will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered
only for the original warranty period.When the warranty
on the original product expires, the warranty on the
replacement product also expires.
WHAT IS EXCLUDED?
Your warranty does not cover:
• labor charges for installation or setup of the product,
adjustment of customer controls on the product, and
installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the
product.
• product repair and/or part replacement because of
misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause
not within the control of Philips.
• reception problems caused by signal conditions or
cable or antenna systems outside the unit.
• a product that requires modification or adaptation to
enable it to operate in any country other than the
country for which it was designed, manufactured,
approved and/or authorized, or repair of products
damaged by these modifications.
• incidental or consequential damages resulting from the
product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above
exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not
limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted
or not copyrighted.)
• a product used for commercial or institutional purposes.
WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE?
You may exchange the product in all countries where the
product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries
where Philips does not distribute the product, the local
Philips service organization will attempt to provide a
replacement product (although there may be a delay if the
appropriate product is not readily available).
BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE...
Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you
have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039.
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A.,
PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS...
Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship
the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of
purchase enclosed, to the address listed below.
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the
duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do
not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may
last, this limitation may not apply to you.)
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA...
Please contact Philips at:
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking)
(In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied,
including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any
circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or
consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified
of the possibility of such damages.)
REMEMBER...
Please record below the model and serial numbers found
on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty
registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify
you if necessary.
MODEL #
__________________________________
SERIAL #
__________________________________
lines, etc.).
●
Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période.
EL 6475-F003: 02/8
Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II
Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation.
INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8.
9.
10.
11.
MAC5097
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Échange gratuite pendant un an
Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger.
QUI EST COUVERT ?
Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir
bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou
un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que
vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme
preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les
garder tous les deux à portée de main.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ?
La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où
vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette
date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas
sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit
comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit
de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période
non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du
produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de
remplacement est terminée aussi.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ?
La garantie ne couvre pas :
• les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer,
pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer
les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit.
• la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du
mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées
ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par
Philips.
• des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal,
au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité.
• un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations
pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que
le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou
autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par
de telles modifications.
• des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du
produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas
l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est
donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au
cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative,
des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les
lois sur les droits d’auteur).
• un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou
institutionnelles.
OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ?
Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit
est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où
Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service
Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais
il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas
facilement disponible).
Lea estas instrucciones.
Conserve estas instrucciones.
Lea todos los avisos.
Siga todas las instrucciones.
No utilice este aparato cerca del
agua.
Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo
un trapo seco.
No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de
acuerdo con las instrucciones del
fabricante.
No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes
de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores,
estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor.
No anule la
seguridad de la
clavija de corriente
Clavija
polarizada
(ya sea de tipo polarde CA
izado o
con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas
tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la
otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra
tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la
de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más
ancha como la toma de tierra han sido
incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad
personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el
equipo no es compatible con su toma de
corriente, consulte a un electricista para
sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta.
Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más
próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida
del equipo.
Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados
por el fabricante.
12.
Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros,
bases, trípodes, soportes o
mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el
equipo. Cuando utilice un carro,
tenga cuidado al desplazar el
conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco.
13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser
utilizado durante largo tiempo.
14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las
reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre
que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el
cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que
hubieran podido introducirse en su interior,
por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a
ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no
funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera
sufrido algún tipo de caída.
15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para
prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden
ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a
su propiedad o dañar la unidad:
● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad.
● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o
de carbono y alcalinas, etc.).
● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la
unidad durante largo tiempo.
EL 6475-S003: 02/8
Símbolo del equipo Clase II
Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento.
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
– remote control
– USB cable
– video cable
– CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers
– AC power cord
TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1)
1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack.
Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones
are connected to the set.
2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level
(BASS/ MID /HIGH)
3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off.
4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/
TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX
5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control
6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set
7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power.
8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
SEARCH ∞ , §
MP3-CD / CD :
- searches backward or forward ;
- skips to the beginning of a current track/
previous/ later track.
USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a
previous/ later track.
TUNER : - tunes to radio stations
2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
MODE :
- selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat
or shuffle order.
9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the
USB port of your computer
0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode
WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off
EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high
frequencies.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
GARANTIE LIMITÉE
AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE…
Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance.
Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au
1-800-531-0039.
POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES
ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES…
Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange.
Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec
preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous :
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie
implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude
à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie
explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces
ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite,
cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.)
POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AU CANADA…
Veuillez contacter Philips au :
1-800-661-6162 (Francophone)
1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone)
(Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute
autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle
soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite
de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est
pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit
directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents,
quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une
notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.)
RAPPEL IMPORTANT...
Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de
série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez
remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de
garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en
cas de besoin.
Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________
Nº DE SÉRIE
_____________________________
options recommandés par le fabricant.
No. de serie ______________________
sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla
ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha.
des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca-
11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou
No. de modelo ____________________
PRECAUCION: Para evitar
Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec
de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même.
Para uso del cliente:
Escriba abajo el número de serie que se
encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde
esta información para el futuro.
TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA
ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO
EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA
NI A HUMEDAD.
Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels
qu’indiqués sur l’appareil.
●
aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point
7.
ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI-
●
10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter
PRECAUCION
RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA
NO ABRIR
toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des
pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale.
MAC5097
Registro
del modelo
15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter
sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise
chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne
correspondante de la prise et pousser
jusqu’au fond.
• Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida
la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
empacada con su aparato y saque
provecho de estas ventajas importantes.
qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a
subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon
deux lames
DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les
14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel
de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des
prise polarisée est dotée de
N° de série ______________________
CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A
UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR
ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE
ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE.
13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il
Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du
chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches
9.
Utilisez uniquement un meuble
Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif-
plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre
Confirmación
del dueño
simbolos de
One Year Free Exchange
This product must be carried in for an exchange.
EL 6475-E004: 02/8
Conservez ces instructions.
N° de modèle ____________________
Verificación
de la garantía
Conozca estos
●
2.
6.
The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
●
PORTABLE AUDIO
SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE
Cet espace vous est réservé
Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé
à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir.
Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes.
• Una vez que se registre la compra de
su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a
todas las ventajas correspondientes al
dueño de un producto Philips.
●
Lisez ces instructions.
murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien
3140 115 3102.1
15.
1.
AT T E N T I O N
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
14.
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES
6.
Connaissez ces
13.
Use only with the cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer or
sold with the apparatus. When a
cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning
storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent
battery leakage which may result in bodily
injury, property damage, or damage to the
unit:
Install all batteries correctly, + and - as
marked on the unit.
Do not mix batteries (old and new or
carbon and alkaline, etc.).
Remove batteries when the unit is not
used for a long time.
Class II equipment symbol
This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system.
http://www.philips.com
W
12.
English
This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
MAC5097
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near
water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the
manufacturer´s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
Do not defeat
the safety
purpose of the
AC Polarized
polarized or
Plug
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has
two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and
a third grounding prong.The wide blade or
the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being
walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories
specified by the manufacturer.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171
IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS
Supported formats:
• Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session
CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs.
• MP3 music fomats.
• MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable
bit rate.
• 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs.
• Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels
(max. 64 characters).
General information
The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio
Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a
factor up to 10 without losing significant sound
quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of
CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM.
How to get MP3 music
Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or
convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3
encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W).
• To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at
least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files.
• Some encoder software offer an option to protect
music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the
computer which created them. If you burn such
files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this
set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option
in the encoder software before creating the music
files. In this case you are responsible for
adherence to all local or international copyrights.
When burning the MP3-CD
• To avoid problems with playback or missing files,
make sure the file names are typed in English text
characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3
• Use a writing software capable of recording MP3
track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical
order. For details on using the software, refer to
the operating instructions of the software.
• When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you
close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to
read and play your tracks.
CONTROL
PROG
MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the
programmed songs;
TUNER : - programs radio stations.
FM•AM / DISPLAY
FM•AM : - selects waveband
DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions
! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for
external audio appliance.
VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place
@ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door
BACK PANEL (See 1)
# Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception
$ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type
R-20, UM-1 or D-cells
% AC MAINS - inlet for power cord
^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a
TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
REMOTE CONTROL (See 1)
1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source
TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands
USB - selects USB PC LINK
AUX - selects GAME •AUX
2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set
operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if
battery powered)
3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source
or selects the repeat modes in CD source
SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random
order in CD / USB PC LINK source
MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound
4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer
level (BASS/ MID /HIGH)
5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD /
USB PC LINK playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a
MP3-CD / CD track.
TUNER: - tunes to radio stations
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
How to organize MP3 files
You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums
and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song
file sizes.
Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted.
• MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as
numbers in the display.
IMPORTANT!
This set does not play/support the following:
• Empty albums: an empty album is an album that
does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown
in the display.
• Non-supported file formats are skipped. This
means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3
files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not
be played.
• Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC,
Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer
7.0, MusicMatch.
• Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and
Package Writing.
Playing MP3-CD & CD
This CD player plays Audio Discs including
CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs.
• CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not
possible.
1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then
select CD SOURCE.
2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door.
]
is displayed when the CD door is
open.
3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press
down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door.
]Display show
,when reading disc
contents;
]Display :
if no disc inserted/
disc incorrectly inserted.,
]Display :
or
if disc damaged / dirty:.
–
throughout CD operation;
–
throughout MP3-CD operation;
– In CD stop mode: total track number and total
playback time.
POWER SUPPLY
BASIC FUNCTIONS
6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high
frequencies
WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off
GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode
7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY
As a power-saving feature, the system automatically
switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has
reached the end and no control is operated.
POWER SUPPLY
Whenever convenient, use the power supply to
conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the
power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting
batteries.
Switching on and off and selecting function
1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on.
2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your
desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or
GAME•AUX .
3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Batteries (not included) (See 1)
• Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells,
(preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity.
Remote control (See A)
• Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4
(preferably alkaline).
Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the
batteries to burst.
• Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon
zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set.
• When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old
batteries with the new ones.
• Batteries contain chemical substances, so
they should be disposed of properly.
Using AC Power
1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the
type plate located on the bottom of the set,
corresponds to your local power supply. If it does
not, consult your dealer or service center.
2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector,
adjust the selector so that it matches with the
local power supply.
3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the
set is now ready for use.
4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set
from the wall jack.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
–
is shown if you have inserted a
non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc.
Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to
read.
4. Press 2; to start playback.
=Display: Current track number and elapsed track
time during MP3-CD / CD playback.
=If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown.
5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to
resume play.
= Time digits flashes during pause.
6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9.
7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when:
– the CD door is opened
– the CD has reached the end
– you select other sound source.
MP3-CD/ CD text display
During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information:
MP3-CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– track name and elapsed track time;
– album name and elapsed track time;
– album number, track number and elapsed track
time;
– ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display
shows
.
CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback;
– Remaining playback time of current track.
Selecting a different track
• Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡
or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track
number appears in the display.
• If you have selected a track number shortly after
loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will
need to press 2; to start playback.
The type plate is located on the bottom of
the set.
BASIC FUNCTIONS
Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and
the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of
VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory.
Adjusting volume and sound (See 2)
1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control.
= Display shows the volume level
and a
number from 0-32.
2. wOOx
To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or
more to switch on / off.
= wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is
turned on.
Notes:
- wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
- Some discs might be recorded in high modulation,
which causes a distortion at high volume. If this
occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume.
3. EQUALIZER
To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press
EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME
within 3 seconds to adjust each level.
=Display briefly shows
, or
,
level (-5 to +5) or
.
Note:
1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album.
] Display:
if no albums are
available.
Finding a passage within a track
1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote
control 5 or 6).
– The CD is played at high speed and low volume.
– No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/
review.
2. When you recognize the passage you want,
release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on
the remote control 5 or 6)
Note: Searching is only possible within a track.
Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See
4 - 7)
You can select and change the various play modes
before or during playback. The play modes can also be
combined with PROGRAM.
shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are
played in random order
shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program
continuously in random order
repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program
repeat - plays the current track continuously
1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more.
(SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control).
2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position.
]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts
automatically.
3. To select normal playback, press MODE
repeatedly until the various modes are no longer
displayed.
– You can also press the 9 to cancel your play
mode in playing.
DIGITAL TUNER
2. To prevent sound interference the bass control
options operate exclusively. You cannot combine
the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx
4. GAMESOUND
To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once
or more to select your option.
=Display briefly shows
,
,
or
.
DIGITAL TUNER
1
until you have found optimal reception.
To improve radio reception:
• For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic
antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too
strong.
• For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this
antenna by turning the whole set.
HEAVY !
Take care of your CD Soundmachine.
Grip both handles when you carry or
lift the set.
Programming tuner stations:
1
Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you
play in GAME•AUX source.
You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the
memory, manually or automatically (Autostore).
2
How to MUTE the sound
1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt
sound reproduction instantly.
= Playback continues without sound and the
display flashes
.
Autostore
Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The
set will only program stations which are not in the
memory already.
1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
select the preset number .
2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate
auto store programming.
= Display:
is shown and available
stations are programmed in order of waveband
FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then
be played after all stations are stored
automatically.
2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can:
– press MUTE again;
– adjust the volume controls;
– change to another source.
DIGITAL TUNER (See 3)
Tuning to stations
1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press
SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press
TUNER once on the remote control).
= Display: shows
briefly followed by
waveband, frequency, and preset station
number if already stored.
2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select
your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control)
3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your
stations manually or by automatic search tuning:
Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote
control ) and release button when the frequency in
the display starts running.
= The radio automatically tunes to a station of
sufficient reception. Display shows
during automatic tuning.
4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the
desired station.
• To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or
6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
Programming track numbers
Program in the stop position to select and store your
CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store
any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be
stored in the memory.
1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your
desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or
™)
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the
remote control ¡ or ™).
2. Press PROG.
™ Display: program and the selected track
number
appears briefly.
™ Display :
if no track
selected for programming.
3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired
tracks.
™ Display:
if you try to program more
than 20 tracks.
4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;.
Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG
to add a current track to your program list.
Reviewing the program
In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a
while until the display shows all your stored track
numbers in sequence.
=Display
if no tracks programmed.
Erasing a program
You can erase the program by:
• pressing 9 twice;
=
displayed briefly, and program
disappears.
• pressing STANDBY ON y
• selecting another sound source
• opening the CD door.
@
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
Manual programming
1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to
stations).
2. Press PROG to activate programming.
= Display: program flashes.
1
#3
3
5
4
5
$
5. Repeat the above four steps to store other
stations.
Note : You can erase a preset station by storing
another frequency in its place.
2
4
3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station.
4. Press PROG again to confirm.
= Display shows the preset number, waveband
and the frequency of the preset station.
7
^
8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL
6
%
To listen to a preset station
Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until
the desired preset station is displayed.
GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
0
GAMESOUND (See 8)
PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND:
1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the
GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control)
=Display scrolls :
2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front
of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO
IN.
3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your
game sound option.
,
,
=Display briefly shows
or
.
Connecting other equipment to your system
Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO
OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on
a TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
USB PC LINK
Quick Setup Guide
PC system requirements
– USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP
– Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher
– CD-ROM drive
Installing MusicMatch software
1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the
USB port on your computer. (See B)
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or
more to select USB PC LINK.
3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK
installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This
application software can also be downloaded from
http://www.audio.philips.com.
IMPORTANT!
Please use this customized MusicMatch
software for your USB PC Link application.
Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch
jukebox software first from your PC system (if
available).
X
6
A
B
2 x AAA
USB
EL6095T004 / 8-02
USB PC LINK
USB PC LINK
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
GARANTIA LIMITADA
SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL
Cambio gratis por un año
Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo.
¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION?
Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el
producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando
que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante
de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo
a la mano.
¿QUE CUBRE?
La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que
usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta
fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso
con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un
producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el
período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía
original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del
producto de reemplazo.
¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA?
Su garantía no cubre:
• cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje
del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de
preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con
antena fuera de la unidad.
• reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz
de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u
otra causa no bajo el control de Philips.
• problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de
señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la
unidad.
• un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para
que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue
concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la
reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones.
• daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del
producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por
daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible
que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.
Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin
amparo de derechos de autor.)
• una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o
institucionales.
¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO?
Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con
distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países
donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de
servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo
(aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no
está fácilmente disponible).
ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO…
Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda.
Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039.
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS
EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES…
Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio.
También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y
transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante
de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación:
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía
implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y
aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en
cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto
que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la
duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación
arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.)
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL
CANADA…
Favor de comunicarse con Philips al:
1-800-661-6162 (francófono)
1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante)
(En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda
otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni
implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita
de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips
no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y
perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o
consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada,
aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.)
RECUERDE…
Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del
producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y
enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía.
Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario.
Modelo No.
________________________________
Serie No.
________________________________
4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it
does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows
Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe.
Then perform the following steps:
– Select your desired language from the list.
– Select installer driver.
– Select installer MusicMatch jukebox.
– Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies,
FAQ).
Note:
- You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial
before using it for the first time. Make sure the
volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure
sound output on the set. For optimum performance,
the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to
a low level.
5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create
your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and
dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC
into the playlist window.
Note:
-- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK,
please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)
stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit
www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates .
After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link"
for details on the USB PC LINK operations.
Enable digital CD audio output
Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is
necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows:
For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP
1. Enter the system panel menu and select
'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE',
'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and
'PROPERTIES'.
For Windows 98 SE
2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled).
Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer
to your PC's manual for correct configuration.
Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9)
The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set.
IMPORTANT!
Make sure the MusicMatch software has been
installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the
USB PC Link.
1. Turn on your set and computer .
] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and
not set to minimum / mute.
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once
or more to select USB PC LINK .
3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically
launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX.
] If the audio streaming is detected, the current
track name scrolls .
] If
scrolls for a while, check
the connection between your PC and set.
4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist
is highlighted.
5. Press 2; to start playback.
] The track time appears and the track name
scrolls once.
Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase.
6. If you want to see the track details displayed press
MODE.
During playback,
– Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all
available tracks in the playlist in random order.
– Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat
playback all the tracks in the playlist.
7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or
select another sound sources.
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0)
CD player and disc handling
• If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a
cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set
to repair.
• The lens of the CD player should never be touched!
• Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature
can cause condensation on the lens of your CD
player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not
attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a
warm environment until the moisture evaporates.
• To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the
center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free
cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may
damage the disc.
• Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it.
Safety Information
• Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity,
rain, sand or excessive heat.
• Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning
agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set.
• Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the
system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating.
• Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.
• Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus
(e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles).
If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable
to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center.
CAUTION
WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation.
circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty.
No sound /power
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
•
•
–
•
Volume not adjusted
Adjust the VOLUME
Power cord not securely connected
Connect the AC power cord properly
Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Headphones connected to the set
Disconnect headphones
Electrostatic discharge/interference
Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries
from the battery compartment. Press and hold
STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug /
replace battery supply, and try activating the set again.
When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's
volume is audible and not set to minimum.
When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer
to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output.
CD contains non-audio files
Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to
a CD audio track, instead of the data file
Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode
• Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console
Severe radio hum or noise
– Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or
computer
• Move the set to increase the distance
Remote control does not function properly
–
•
–
•
Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Distance/ angle between the set too large
Reduce the distance/ angle
Poor radio reception
– Weak radio signal
• FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial
indication
– CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized
• Use an unfinalized CD-R(W)
indication
–
•
–
•
–
•
No CD inserted
Inserted a suitable disc
CD badly scratched or dirty
Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance
Laser lens steamed up
Wait until lens has cleared
The CD skips tracks
– CD damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean CD
– shuffle or program is active
• Switch off shuffle / program
is displayed in USB PC LINK
mode for more than 10 sconds
– Check the connection between your PC and the set. If
necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to
USB PC Link for the initial setup required.
• Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the
MusicMatch software is working.
Sound skips during MP3 playback
– MP3 file made at compression level exceeding
320kbps
• Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks
into MP3 format
– Disc damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean disc
Cannot find desired MP3 title
– Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with
unsuitable text characters used
• Make sure the file names are typed in English
text characters an that the MP3 files end with
.mp3
Environmental information
We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3
materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene.
Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized
company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the
disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment.
Philips AZ2558
Tested To Comply
With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Philips Consumer Electronics North America
One Philips Drive
Knoxville TN 37914
Phone: 1-800-531-0039
az2558/17
13/5/03
12:15
Page 1
Return your Warranty Registration card today to
2558
MP3-CD Soundmachine
AZ
AZ
ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to.
Return
your Warranty
Registration Card
within 10 days
EE
CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER
RETURNING THE PRODUCT!
E
S
Philips representatives are ready to help you with
any questions about your new product.We can guide you
through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features.
We want you to start enjoying your new product right away!
RTAN
PO
• So complete and return the Warranty
Registration Card enclosed with your
purchase at once, and take advantage
of these important benefits.
T!
Need help? Call us!
IM
• Once your Philips purchase is registered,
you’re eligible to receive all the privileges
of owning a Philips product.
WH
Y INS
ID
1-800-531-0039
or
Visit us on the web at www.philips.com
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Warranty
Verification
Owner
Confirmation
Model
Registration
Registering your product
within 10 days confirms
your right to maximum
protection under the
terms and conditions of
your Philips warranty.
Your completed Warranty
Registration Card serves
as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss.
Returning your Warranty
Registration Card right
away guarantees you’ll
receive all the information
and special offers which
you qualify for as the
owner of your model.
8.
9.
Know these
safety symbols
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Model No. _______________________
Serial No. ________________________
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material
within your unit may cause
an electrical shock. For the safety of
everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
WARNING: TO PREVENT
The “exclamation point” calls
attention to features for
which you should read the
enclosed literature closely to prevent
operating and maintenance problems.
shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot, and fully insert.
FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO
NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION: To prevent electric
10.
11.
English
Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous
assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit.
• Dès que l’achat de votre appareil
Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à
tous les avantages dont bénéficient les
possesseurs des produits Philips.
Meet Philips at the Internet
• Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte
d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à
votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants.
Français
Español
Vérification
de garantie
Confirmation
de possession
Enregistrement
du modèle
Enregistrez votre produit
dans les 10 jours pour
confirmer votre droit à
une protection maximum
selon les termes et les
conditions de votre
garantie Philips.
Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie
prouve que vous possédez
l’appareil en cas de vol ou
de perte du produit.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès
aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les
informations, les offres et les
bonus auxquels vous avez
droit en tant que possesseur
de ce modèle.
AZ 2558
symboles de
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
sécurite
ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER
LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE
PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A
UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE.
Cet « éclair à pointe de
flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur
de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc
électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun,
nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le
boîtier de ce produit.
Printed in China
Canada
English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les
limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur
le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada.
Le « point d’exclamation »
attire votre attention sur des
sujets risquant de provoquer
des problèmes de fonctionnement et
d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant.
Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures :
– Relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une
3.
Respectez les avertissements.
étagère ou une table de type recom-
4.
Suivez toutes les instructions.
mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un
N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une
meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer
source d’eau.
avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci-
5.
7.
8.
12.
dent corporel si l’équipement se renver-
fon sec.
sait.
N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation.
doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps
fabricant.
prolongée.
N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de
amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur.
d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap-
Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la
pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap-
prise de terre ou prise
pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne
polarisée fournie. Une
fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute.
Prise
polarisée C.A.
IMPORTANT :
Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to
operate this device.
Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima
protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la
garantía de Philips.
Su Tarjeta de Registro de
la Garantía comprueba
que Ud. es el dueño del
aparato en caso de robo
o pérdida del producto.
La devolución inmediata de
su Tarjeta de Registro de la
Garantía le garantiza que
recibirá toda la información
y todas las promociones
especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño
de su modelo.
seguridad
dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est
blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou
dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième,
d’endommager l’appareil :
PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE
LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA
PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN
SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO.
El símbolo del «rayo» indica
que algún material no aislado
dentro de su unidad podría
resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para
la seguridad de todos, favor de no
remover la cubierta del producto.
de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement
El «signo de exclamación» le
llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud.
debe leer la información adjunta
detenidamente para evitar problemas
de funcionamiento y mantenimiento.
WHO IS COVERED?
You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product.
A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach
it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby.
WHAT IS COVERED?
Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product.
For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product
will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered
only for the original warranty period.When the warranty
on the original product expires, the warranty on the
replacement product also expires.
WHAT IS EXCLUDED?
Your warranty does not cover:
• labor charges for installation or setup of the product,
adjustment of customer controls on the product, and
installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the
product.
• product repair and/or part replacement because of
misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause
not within the control of Philips.
• reception problems caused by signal conditions or
cable or antenna systems outside the unit.
• a product that requires modification or adaptation to
enable it to operate in any country other than the
country for which it was designed, manufactured,
approved and/or authorized, or repair of products
damaged by these modifications.
• incidental or consequential damages resulting from the
product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above
exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not
limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted
or not copyrighted.)
• a product used for commercial or institutional purposes.
WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE?
You may exchange the product in all countries where the
product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries
where Philips does not distribute the product, the local
Philips service organization will attempt to provide a
replacement product (although there may be a delay if the
appropriate product is not readily available).
BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE...
Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you
have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039.
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A.,
PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS...
Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship
the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of
purchase enclosed, to the address listed below.
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the
duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do
not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may
last, this limitation may not apply to you.)
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA...
Please contact Philips at:
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking)
(In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied,
including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any
circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or
consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified
of the possibility of such damages.)
REMEMBER...
Please record below the model and serial numbers found
on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty
registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify
you if necessary.
MODEL #
__________________________________
SERIAL #
__________________________________
lines, etc.).
●
Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période.
EL 6475-F003: 02/8
Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II
Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation.
INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8.
9.
10.
11.
MAC5097
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Échange gratuite pendant un an
Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger.
QUI EST COUVERT ?
Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir
bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou
un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que
vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme
preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les
garder tous les deux à portée de main.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ?
La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où
vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette
date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas
sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit
comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit
de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période
non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du
produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de
remplacement est terminée aussi.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ?
La garantie ne couvre pas :
• les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer,
pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer
les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit.
• la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du
mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées
ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par
Philips.
• des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal,
au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité.
• un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations
pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que
le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou
autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par
de telles modifications.
• des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du
produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas
l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est
donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au
cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative,
des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les
lois sur les droits d’auteur).
• un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou
institutionnelles.
OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ?
Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit
est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où
Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service
Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais
il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas
facilement disponible).
Lea estas instrucciones.
Conserve estas instrucciones.
Lea todos los avisos.
Siga todas las instrucciones.
No utilice este aparato cerca del
agua.
Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo
un trapo seco.
No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de
acuerdo con las instrucciones del
fabricante.
No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes
de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores,
estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor.
No anule la
seguridad de la
clavija de corriente
Clavija
polarizada
(ya sea de tipo polarde CA
izado o
con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas
tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la
otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra
tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la
de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más
ancha como la toma de tierra han sido
incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad
personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el
equipo no es compatible con su toma de
corriente, consulte a un electricista para
sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta.
Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más
próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida
del equipo.
Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados
por el fabricante.
12.
Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros,
bases, trípodes, soportes o
mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el
equipo. Cuando utilice un carro,
tenga cuidado al desplazar el
conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco.
13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser
utilizado durante largo tiempo.
14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las
reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre
que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el
cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que
hubieran podido introducirse en su interior,
por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a
ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no
funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera
sufrido algún tipo de caída.
15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para
prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden
ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a
su propiedad o dañar la unidad:
● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad.
● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o
de carbono y alcalinas, etc.).
● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la
unidad durante largo tiempo.
EL 6475-S003: 02/8
Símbolo del equipo Clase II
Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento.
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
– remote control
– USB cable
– video cable
– CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers
– AC power cord
TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1)
1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack.
Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones
are connected to the set.
2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level
(BASS/ MID /HIGH)
3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off.
4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/
TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX
5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control
6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set
7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power.
8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
SEARCH ∞ , §
MP3-CD / CD :
- searches backward or forward ;
- skips to the beginning of a current track/
previous/ later track.
USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a
previous/ later track.
TUNER : - tunes to radio stations
2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
MODE :
- selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat
or shuffle order.
9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the
USB port of your computer
0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode
WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off
EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high
frequencies.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
GARANTIE LIMITÉE
AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE…
Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance.
Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au
1-800-531-0039.
POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES
ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES…
Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange.
Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec
preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous :
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie
implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude
à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie
explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces
ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite,
cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.)
POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AU CANADA…
Veuillez contacter Philips au :
1-800-661-6162 (Francophone)
1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone)
(Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute
autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle
soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite
de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est
pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit
directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents,
quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une
notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.)
RAPPEL IMPORTANT...
Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de
série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez
remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de
garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en
cas de besoin.
Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________
Nº DE SÉRIE
_____________________________
options recommandés par le fabricant.
No. de serie ______________________
sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla
ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha.
des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca-
11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou
No. de modelo ____________________
PRECAUCION: Para evitar
Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec
de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même.
Para uso del cliente:
Escriba abajo el número de serie que se
encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde
esta información para el futuro.
TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA
ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO
EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA
NI A HUMEDAD.
Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels
qu’indiqués sur l’appareil.
●
aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point
7.
ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI-
●
10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter
PRECAUCION
RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA
NO ABRIR
toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des
pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale.
MAC5097
Registro
del modelo
15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter
sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise
chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne
correspondante de la prise et pousser
jusqu’au fond.
• Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida
la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
empacada con su aparato y saque
provecho de estas ventajas importantes.
qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a
subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon
deux lames
DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les
14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel
de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des
prise polarisée est dotée de
N° de série ______________________
CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A
UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR
ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE
ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE.
13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il
Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du
chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches
9.
Utilisez uniquement un meuble
Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif-
plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre
Confirmación
del dueño
simbolos de
One Year Free Exchange
This product must be carried in for an exchange.
EL 6475-E004: 02/8
Conservez ces instructions.
N° de modèle ____________________
Verificación
de la garantía
Conozca estos
●
2.
6.
The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
●
PORTABLE AUDIO
SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE
Cet espace vous est réservé
Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé
à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir.
Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes.
• Una vez que se registre la compra de
su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a
todas las ventajas correspondientes al
dueño de un producto Philips.
●
Lisez ces instructions.
murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien
3140 115 3102.1
15.
1.
AT T E N T I O N
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
14.
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES
6.
Connaissez ces
13.
Use only with the cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer or
sold with the apparatus. When a
cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning
storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent
battery leakage which may result in bodily
injury, property damage, or damage to the
unit:
Install all batteries correctly, + and - as
marked on the unit.
Do not mix batteries (old and new or
carbon and alkaline, etc.).
Remove batteries when the unit is not
used for a long time.
Class II equipment symbol
This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system.
http://www.philips.com
W
12.
English
This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
MAC5097
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near
water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the
manufacturer´s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
Do not defeat
the safety
purpose of the
AC Polarized
polarized or
Plug
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has
two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and
a third grounding prong.The wide blade or
the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being
walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories
specified by the manufacturer.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171
IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS
Supported formats:
• Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session
CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs.
• MP3 music fomats.
• MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable
bit rate.
• 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs.
• Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels
(max. 64 characters).
General information
The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio
Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a
factor up to 10 without losing significant sound
quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of
CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM.
How to get MP3 music
Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or
convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3
encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W).
• To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at
least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files.
• Some encoder software offer an option to protect
music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the
computer which created them. If you burn such
files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this
set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option
in the encoder software before creating the music
files. In this case you are responsible for
adherence to all local or international copyrights.
When burning the MP3-CD
• To avoid problems with playback or missing files,
make sure the file names are typed in English text
characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3
• Use a writing software capable of recording MP3
track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical
order. For details on using the software, refer to
the operating instructions of the software.
• When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you
close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to
read and play your tracks.
CONTROL
PROG
MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the
programmed songs;
TUNER : - programs radio stations.
FM•AM / DISPLAY
FM•AM : - selects waveband
DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions
! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for
external audio appliance.
VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place
@ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door
BACK PANEL (See 1)
# Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception
$ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type
R-20, UM-1 or D-cells
% AC MAINS - inlet for power cord
^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a
TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
REMOTE CONTROL (See 1)
1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source
TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands
USB - selects USB PC LINK
AUX - selects GAME •AUX
2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set
operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if
battery powered)
3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source
or selects the repeat modes in CD source
SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random
order in CD / USB PC LINK source
MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound
4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer
level (BASS/ MID /HIGH)
5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD /
USB PC LINK playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a
MP3-CD / CD track.
TUNER: - tunes to radio stations
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
How to organize MP3 files
You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums
and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song
file sizes.
Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted.
• MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as
numbers in the display.
IMPORTANT!
This set does not play/support the following:
• Empty albums: an empty album is an album that
does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown
in the display.
• Non-supported file formats are skipped. This
means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3
files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not
be played.
• Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC,
Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer
7.0, MusicMatch.
• Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and
Package Writing.
Playing MP3-CD & CD
This CD player plays Audio Discs including
CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs.
• CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not
possible.
1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then
select CD SOURCE.
2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door.
]
is displayed when the CD door is
open.
3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press
down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door.
]Display show
,when reading disc
contents;
]Display :
if no disc inserted/
disc incorrectly inserted.,
]Display :
or
if disc damaged / dirty:.
–
throughout CD operation;
–
throughout MP3-CD operation;
– In CD stop mode: total track number and total
playback time.
POWER SUPPLY
BASIC FUNCTIONS
6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high
frequencies
WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off
GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode
7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY
As a power-saving feature, the system automatically
switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has
reached the end and no control is operated.
POWER SUPPLY
Whenever convenient, use the power supply to
conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the
power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting
batteries.
Switching on and off and selecting function
1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on.
2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your
desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or
GAME•AUX .
3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Batteries (not included) (See 1)
• Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells,
(preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity.
Remote control (See A)
• Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4
(preferably alkaline).
Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the
batteries to burst.
• Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon
zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set.
• When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old
batteries with the new ones.
• Batteries contain chemical substances, so
they should be disposed of properly.
Using AC Power
1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the
type plate located on the bottom of the set,
corresponds to your local power supply. If it does
not, consult your dealer or service center.
2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector,
adjust the selector so that it matches with the
local power supply.
3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the
set is now ready for use.
4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set
from the wall jack.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
–
is shown if you have inserted a
non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc.
Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to
read.
4. Press 2; to start playback.
=Display: Current track number and elapsed track
time during MP3-CD / CD playback.
=If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown.
5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to
resume play.
= Time digits flashes during pause.
6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9.
7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when:
– the CD door is opened
– the CD has reached the end
– you select other sound source.
MP3-CD/ CD text display
During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information:
MP3-CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– track name and elapsed track time;
– album name and elapsed track time;
– album number, track number and elapsed track
time;
– ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display
shows
.
CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback;
– Remaining playback time of current track.
Selecting a different track
• Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡
or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track
number appears in the display.
• If you have selected a track number shortly after
loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will
need to press 2; to start playback.
The type plate is located on the bottom of
the set.
BASIC FUNCTIONS
Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and
the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of
VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory.
Adjusting volume and sound (See 2)
1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control.
= Display shows the volume level
and a
number from 0-32.
2. wOOx
To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or
more to switch on / off.
= wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is
turned on.
Notes:
- wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
- Some discs might be recorded in high modulation,
which causes a distortion at high volume. If this
occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume.
3. EQUALIZER
To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press
EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME
within 3 seconds to adjust each level.
=Display briefly shows
, or
,
level (-5 to +5) or
.
Note:
1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album.
] Display:
if no albums are
available.
Finding a passage within a track
1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote
control 5 or 6).
– The CD is played at high speed and low volume.
– No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/
review.
2. When you recognize the passage you want,
release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on
the remote control 5 or 6)
Note: Searching is only possible within a track.
Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See
4 - 7)
You can select and change the various play modes
before or during playback. The play modes can also be
combined with PROGRAM.
shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are
played in random order
shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program
continuously in random order
repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program
repeat - plays the current track continuously
1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more.
(SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control).
2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position.
]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts
automatically.
3. To select normal playback, press MODE
repeatedly until the various modes are no longer
displayed.
– You can also press the 9 to cancel your play
mode in playing.
DIGITAL TUNER
2. To prevent sound interference the bass control
options operate exclusively. You cannot combine
the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx
4. GAMESOUND
To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once
or more to select your option.
=Display briefly shows
,
,
or
.
DIGITAL TUNER
1
until you have found optimal reception.
To improve radio reception:
• For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic
antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too
strong.
• For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this
antenna by turning the whole set.
HEAVY !
Take care of your CD Soundmachine.
Grip both handles when you carry or
lift the set.
Programming tuner stations:
1
Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you
play in GAME•AUX source.
You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the
memory, manually or automatically (Autostore).
2
How to MUTE the sound
1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt
sound reproduction instantly.
= Playback continues without sound and the
display flashes
.
Autostore
Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The
set will only program stations which are not in the
memory already.
1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
select the preset number .
2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate
auto store programming.
= Display:
is shown and available
stations are programmed in order of waveband
FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then
be played after all stations are stored
automatically.
2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can:
– press MUTE again;
– adjust the volume controls;
– change to another source.
DIGITAL TUNER (See 3)
Tuning to stations
1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press
SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press
TUNER once on the remote control).
= Display: shows
briefly followed by
waveband, frequency, and preset station
number if already stored.
2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select
your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control)
3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your
stations manually or by automatic search tuning:
Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote
control ) and release button when the frequency in
the display starts running.
= The radio automatically tunes to a station of
sufficient reception. Display shows
during automatic tuning.
4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the
desired station.
• To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or
6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
Programming track numbers
Program in the stop position to select and store your
CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store
any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be
stored in the memory.
1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your
desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or
™)
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the
remote control ¡ or ™).
2. Press PROG.
™ Display: program and the selected track
number
appears briefly.
™ Display :
if no track
selected for programming.
3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired
tracks.
™ Display:
if you try to program more
than 20 tracks.
4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;.
Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG
to add a current track to your program list.
Reviewing the program
In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a
while until the display shows all your stored track
numbers in sequence.
=Display
if no tracks programmed.
Erasing a program
You can erase the program by:
• pressing 9 twice;
=
displayed briefly, and program
disappears.
• pressing STANDBY ON y
• selecting another sound source
• opening the CD door.
@
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
Manual programming
1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to
stations).
2. Press PROG to activate programming.
= Display: program flashes.
1
#3
3
5
4
5
$
5. Repeat the above four steps to store other
stations.
Note : You can erase a preset station by storing
another frequency in its place.
2
4
3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station.
4. Press PROG again to confirm.
= Display shows the preset number, waveband
and the frequency of the preset station.
7
^
8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL
6
%
To listen to a preset station
Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until
the desired preset station is displayed.
GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
0
GAMESOUND (See 8)
PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND:
1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the
GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control)
=Display scrolls :
2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front
of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO
IN.
3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your
game sound option.
,
,
=Display briefly shows
or
.
Connecting other equipment to your system
Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO
OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on
a TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
USB PC LINK
Quick Setup Guide
PC system requirements
– USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP
– Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher
– CD-ROM drive
Installing MusicMatch software
1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the
USB port on your computer. (See B)
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or
more to select USB PC LINK.
3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK
installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This
application software can also be downloaded from
http://www.audio.philips.com.
IMPORTANT!
Please use this customized MusicMatch
software for your USB PC Link application.
Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch
jukebox software first from your PC system (if
available).
X
6
A
B
2 x AAA
USB
EL6095T004 / 8-02
USB PC LINK
USB PC LINK
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
GARANTIA LIMITADA
SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL
Cambio gratis por un año
Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo.
¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION?
Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el
producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando
que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante
de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo
a la mano.
¿QUE CUBRE?
La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que
usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta
fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso
con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un
producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el
período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía
original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del
producto de reemplazo.
¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA?
Su garantía no cubre:
• cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje
del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de
preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con
antena fuera de la unidad.
• reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz
de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u
otra causa no bajo el control de Philips.
• problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de
señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la
unidad.
• un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para
que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue
concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la
reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones.
• daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del
producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por
daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible
que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.
Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin
amparo de derechos de autor.)
• una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o
institucionales.
¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO?
Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con
distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países
donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de
servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo
(aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no
está fácilmente disponible).
ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO…
Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda.
Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039.
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS
EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES…
Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio.
También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y
transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante
de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación:
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía
implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y
aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en
cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto
que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la
duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación
arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.)
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL
CANADA…
Favor de comunicarse con Philips al:
1-800-661-6162 (francófono)
1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante)
(En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda
otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni
implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita
de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips
no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y
perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o
consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada,
aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.)
RECUERDE…
Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del
producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y
enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía.
Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario.
Modelo No.
________________________________
Serie No.
________________________________
4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it
does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows
Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe.
Then perform the following steps:
– Select your desired language from the list.
– Select installer driver.
– Select installer MusicMatch jukebox.
– Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies,
FAQ).
Note:
- You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial
before using it for the first time. Make sure the
volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure
sound output on the set. For optimum performance,
the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to
a low level.
5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create
your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and
dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC
into the playlist window.
Note:
-- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK,
please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)
stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit
www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates .
After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link"
for details on the USB PC LINK operations.
Enable digital CD audio output
Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is
necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows:
For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP
1. Enter the system panel menu and select
'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE',
'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and
'PROPERTIES'.
For Windows 98 SE
2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled).
Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer
to your PC's manual for correct configuration.
Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9)
The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set.
IMPORTANT!
Make sure the MusicMatch software has been
installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the
USB PC Link.
1. Turn on your set and computer .
] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and
not set to minimum / mute.
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once
or more to select USB PC LINK .
3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically
launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX.
] If the audio streaming is detected, the current
track name scrolls .
] If
scrolls for a while, check
the connection between your PC and set.
4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist
is highlighted.
5. Press 2; to start playback.
] The track time appears and the track name
scrolls once.
Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase.
6. If you want to see the track details displayed press
MODE.
During playback,
– Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all
available tracks in the playlist in random order.
– Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat
playback all the tracks in the playlist.
7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or
select another sound sources.
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0)
CD player and disc handling
• If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a
cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set
to repair.
• The lens of the CD player should never be touched!
• Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature
can cause condensation on the lens of your CD
player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not
attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a
warm environment until the moisture evaporates.
• To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the
center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free
cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may
damage the disc.
• Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it.
Safety Information
• Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity,
rain, sand or excessive heat.
• Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning
agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set.
• Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the
system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating.
• Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.
• Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus
(e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles).
If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable
to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center.
CAUTION
WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation.
circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty.
No sound /power
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
•
•
–
•
Volume not adjusted
Adjust the VOLUME
Power cord not securely connected
Connect the AC power cord properly
Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Headphones connected to the set
Disconnect headphones
Electrostatic discharge/interference
Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries
from the battery compartment. Press and hold
STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug /
replace battery supply, and try activating the set again.
When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's
volume is audible and not set to minimum.
When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer
to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output.
CD contains non-audio files
Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to
a CD audio track, instead of the data file
Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode
• Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console
Severe radio hum or noise
– Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or
computer
• Move the set to increase the distance
Remote control does not function properly
–
•
–
•
Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Distance/ angle between the set too large
Reduce the distance/ angle
Poor radio reception
– Weak radio signal
• FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial
indication
– CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized
• Use an unfinalized CD-R(W)
indication
–
•
–
•
–
•
No CD inserted
Inserted a suitable disc
CD badly scratched or dirty
Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance
Laser lens steamed up
Wait until lens has cleared
The CD skips tracks
– CD damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean CD
– shuffle or program is active
• Switch off shuffle / program
is displayed in USB PC LINK
mode for more than 10 sconds
– Check the connection between your PC and the set. If
necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to
USB PC Link for the initial setup required.
• Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the
MusicMatch software is working.
Sound skips during MP3 playback
– MP3 file made at compression level exceeding
320kbps
• Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks
into MP3 format
– Disc damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean disc
Cannot find desired MP3 title
– Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with
unsuitable text characters used
• Make sure the file names are typed in English
text characters an that the MP3 files end with
.mp3
Environmental information
We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3
materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene.
Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized
company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the
disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment.
Philips AZ2558
Tested To Comply
With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Philips Consumer Electronics North America
One Philips Drive
Knoxville TN 37914
Phone: 1-800-531-0039
az2558/17
13/5/03
12:15
Page 1
Return your Warranty Registration card today to
2558
MP3-CD Soundmachine
AZ
AZ
ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to.
Return
your Warranty
Registration Card
within 10 days
EE
CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER
RETURNING THE PRODUCT!
E
S
Philips representatives are ready to help you with
any questions about your new product.We can guide you
through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features.
We want you to start enjoying your new product right away!
RTAN
PO
• So complete and return the Warranty
Registration Card enclosed with your
purchase at once, and take advantage
of these important benefits.
T!
Need help? Call us!
IM
• Once your Philips purchase is registered,
you’re eligible to receive all the privileges
of owning a Philips product.
WH
Y INS
ID
1-800-531-0039
or
Visit us on the web at www.philips.com
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Warranty
Verification
Owner
Confirmation
Model
Registration
Registering your product
within 10 days confirms
your right to maximum
protection under the
terms and conditions of
your Philips warranty.
Your completed Warranty
Registration Card serves
as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss.
Returning your Warranty
Registration Card right
away guarantees you’ll
receive all the information
and special offers which
you qualify for as the
owner of your model.
8.
9.
Know these
safety symbols
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Model No. _______________________
Serial No. ________________________
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material
within your unit may cause
an electrical shock. For the safety of
everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
WARNING: TO PREVENT
The “exclamation point” calls
attention to features for
which you should read the
enclosed literature closely to prevent
operating and maintenance problems.
shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot, and fully insert.
FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO
NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION: To prevent electric
10.
11.
English
Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous
assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit.
• Dès que l’achat de votre appareil
Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à
tous les avantages dont bénéficient les
possesseurs des produits Philips.
Meet Philips at the Internet
• Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte
d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à
votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants.
Français
Español
Vérification
de garantie
Confirmation
de possession
Enregistrement
du modèle
Enregistrez votre produit
dans les 10 jours pour
confirmer votre droit à
une protection maximum
selon les termes et les
conditions de votre
garantie Philips.
Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie
prouve que vous possédez
l’appareil en cas de vol ou
de perte du produit.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès
aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les
informations, les offres et les
bonus auxquels vous avez
droit en tant que possesseur
de ce modèle.
AZ 2558
symboles de
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
sécurite
ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER
LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE
PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A
UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE.
Cet « éclair à pointe de
flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur
de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc
électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun,
nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le
boîtier de ce produit.
Printed in China
Canada
English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les
limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur
le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada.
Le « point d’exclamation »
attire votre attention sur des
sujets risquant de provoquer
des problèmes de fonctionnement et
d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant.
Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures :
– Relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une
3.
Respectez les avertissements.
étagère ou une table de type recom-
4.
Suivez toutes les instructions.
mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un
N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une
meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer
source d’eau.
avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci-
5.
7.
8.
12.
dent corporel si l’équipement se renver-
fon sec.
sait.
N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation.
doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps
fabricant.
prolongée.
N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de
amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur.
d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap-
Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la
pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap-
prise de terre ou prise
pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne
polarisée fournie. Une
fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute.
Prise
polarisée C.A.
IMPORTANT :
Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to
operate this device.
Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima
protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la
garantía de Philips.
Su Tarjeta de Registro de
la Garantía comprueba
que Ud. es el dueño del
aparato en caso de robo
o pérdida del producto.
La devolución inmediata de
su Tarjeta de Registro de la
Garantía le garantiza que
recibirá toda la información
y todas las promociones
especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño
de su modelo.
seguridad
dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est
blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou
dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième,
d’endommager l’appareil :
PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE
LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA
PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN
SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO.
El símbolo del «rayo» indica
que algún material no aislado
dentro de su unidad podría
resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para
la seguridad de todos, favor de no
remover la cubierta del producto.
de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement
El «signo de exclamación» le
llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud.
debe leer la información adjunta
detenidamente para evitar problemas
de funcionamiento y mantenimiento.
WHO IS COVERED?
You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product.
A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach
it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby.
WHAT IS COVERED?
Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product.
For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product
will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered
only for the original warranty period.When the warranty
on the original product expires, the warranty on the
replacement product also expires.
WHAT IS EXCLUDED?
Your warranty does not cover:
• labor charges for installation or setup of the product,
adjustment of customer controls on the product, and
installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the
product.
• product repair and/or part replacement because of
misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause
not within the control of Philips.
• reception problems caused by signal conditions or
cable or antenna systems outside the unit.
• a product that requires modification or adaptation to
enable it to operate in any country other than the
country for which it was designed, manufactured,
approved and/or authorized, or repair of products
damaged by these modifications.
• incidental or consequential damages resulting from the
product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above
exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not
limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted
or not copyrighted.)
• a product used for commercial or institutional purposes.
WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE?
You may exchange the product in all countries where the
product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries
where Philips does not distribute the product, the local
Philips service organization will attempt to provide a
replacement product (although there may be a delay if the
appropriate product is not readily available).
BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE...
Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you
have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039.
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A.,
PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS...
Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship
the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of
purchase enclosed, to the address listed below.
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the
duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do
not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may
last, this limitation may not apply to you.)
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA...
Please contact Philips at:
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking)
(In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied,
including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any
circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or
consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified
of the possibility of such damages.)
REMEMBER...
Please record below the model and serial numbers found
on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty
registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify
you if necessary.
MODEL #
__________________________________
SERIAL #
__________________________________
lines, etc.).
●
Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période.
EL 6475-F003: 02/8
Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II
Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation.
INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8.
9.
10.
11.
MAC5097
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Échange gratuite pendant un an
Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger.
QUI EST COUVERT ?
Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir
bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou
un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que
vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme
preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les
garder tous les deux à portée de main.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ?
La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où
vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette
date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas
sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit
comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit
de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période
non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du
produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de
remplacement est terminée aussi.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ?
La garantie ne couvre pas :
• les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer,
pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer
les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit.
• la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du
mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées
ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par
Philips.
• des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal,
au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité.
• un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations
pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que
le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou
autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par
de telles modifications.
• des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du
produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas
l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est
donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au
cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative,
des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les
lois sur les droits d’auteur).
• un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou
institutionnelles.
OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ?
Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit
est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où
Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service
Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais
il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas
facilement disponible).
Lea estas instrucciones.
Conserve estas instrucciones.
Lea todos los avisos.
Siga todas las instrucciones.
No utilice este aparato cerca del
agua.
Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo
un trapo seco.
No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de
acuerdo con las instrucciones del
fabricante.
No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes
de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores,
estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor.
No anule la
seguridad de la
clavija de corriente
Clavija
polarizada
(ya sea de tipo polarde CA
izado o
con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas
tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la
otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra
tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la
de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más
ancha como la toma de tierra han sido
incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad
personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el
equipo no es compatible con su toma de
corriente, consulte a un electricista para
sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta.
Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más
próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida
del equipo.
Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados
por el fabricante.
12.
Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros,
bases, trípodes, soportes o
mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el
equipo. Cuando utilice un carro,
tenga cuidado al desplazar el
conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco.
13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser
utilizado durante largo tiempo.
14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las
reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre
que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el
cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que
hubieran podido introducirse en su interior,
por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a
ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no
funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera
sufrido algún tipo de caída.
15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para
prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden
ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a
su propiedad o dañar la unidad:
● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad.
● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o
de carbono y alcalinas, etc.).
● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la
unidad durante largo tiempo.
EL 6475-S003: 02/8
Símbolo del equipo Clase II
Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento.
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
– remote control
– USB cable
– video cable
– CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers
– AC power cord
TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1)
1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack.
Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones
are connected to the set.
2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level
(BASS/ MID /HIGH)
3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off.
4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/
TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX
5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control
6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set
7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power.
8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
SEARCH ∞ , §
MP3-CD / CD :
- searches backward or forward ;
- skips to the beginning of a current track/
previous/ later track.
USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a
previous/ later track.
TUNER : - tunes to radio stations
2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
MODE :
- selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat
or shuffle order.
9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the
USB port of your computer
0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode
WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off
EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high
frequencies.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
GARANTIE LIMITÉE
AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE…
Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance.
Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au
1-800-531-0039.
POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES
ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES…
Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange.
Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec
preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous :
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie
implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude
à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie
explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces
ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite,
cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.)
POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AU CANADA…
Veuillez contacter Philips au :
1-800-661-6162 (Francophone)
1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone)
(Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute
autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle
soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite
de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est
pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit
directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents,
quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une
notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.)
RAPPEL IMPORTANT...
Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de
série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez
remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de
garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en
cas de besoin.
Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________
Nº DE SÉRIE
_____________________________
options recommandés par le fabricant.
No. de serie ______________________
sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla
ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha.
des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca-
11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou
No. de modelo ____________________
PRECAUCION: Para evitar
Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec
de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même.
Para uso del cliente:
Escriba abajo el número de serie que se
encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde
esta información para el futuro.
TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA
ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO
EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA
NI A HUMEDAD.
Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels
qu’indiqués sur l’appareil.
●
aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point
7.
ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI-
●
10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter
PRECAUCION
RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA
NO ABRIR
toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des
pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale.
MAC5097
Registro
del modelo
15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter
sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise
chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne
correspondante de la prise et pousser
jusqu’au fond.
• Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida
la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
empacada con su aparato y saque
provecho de estas ventajas importantes.
qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a
subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon
deux lames
DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les
14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel
de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des
prise polarisée est dotée de
N° de série ______________________
CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A
UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR
ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE
ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE.
13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il
Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du
chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches
9.
Utilisez uniquement un meuble
Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif-
plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre
Confirmación
del dueño
simbolos de
One Year Free Exchange
This product must be carried in for an exchange.
EL 6475-E004: 02/8
Conservez ces instructions.
N° de modèle ____________________
Verificación
de la garantía
Conozca estos
●
2.
6.
The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
●
PORTABLE AUDIO
SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE
Cet espace vous est réservé
Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé
à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir.
Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes.
• Una vez que se registre la compra de
su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a
todas las ventajas correspondientes al
dueño de un producto Philips.
●
Lisez ces instructions.
murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien
3140 115 3102.1
15.
1.
AT T E N T I O N
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
14.
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES
6.
Connaissez ces
13.
Use only with the cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer or
sold with the apparatus. When a
cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning
storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent
battery leakage which may result in bodily
injury, property damage, or damage to the
unit:
Install all batteries correctly, + and - as
marked on the unit.
Do not mix batteries (old and new or
carbon and alkaline, etc.).
Remove batteries when the unit is not
used for a long time.
Class II equipment symbol
This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system.
http://www.philips.com
W
12.
English
This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
MAC5097
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near
water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the
manufacturer´s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
Do not defeat
the safety
purpose of the
AC Polarized
polarized or
Plug
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has
two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and
a third grounding prong.The wide blade or
the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being
walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories
specified by the manufacturer.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171
IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS
Supported formats:
• Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session
CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs.
• MP3 music fomats.
• MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable
bit rate.
• 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs.
• Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels
(max. 64 characters).
General information
The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio
Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a
factor up to 10 without losing significant sound
quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of
CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM.
How to get MP3 music
Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or
convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3
encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W).
• To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at
least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files.
• Some encoder software offer an option to protect
music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the
computer which created them. If you burn such
files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this
set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option
in the encoder software before creating the music
files. In this case you are responsible for
adherence to all local or international copyrights.
When burning the MP3-CD
• To avoid problems with playback or missing files,
make sure the file names are typed in English text
characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3
• Use a writing software capable of recording MP3
track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical
order. For details on using the software, refer to
the operating instructions of the software.
• When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you
close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to
read and play your tracks.
CONTROL
PROG
MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the
programmed songs;
TUNER : - programs radio stations.
FM•AM / DISPLAY
FM•AM : - selects waveband
DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions
! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for
external audio appliance.
VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place
@ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door
BACK PANEL (See 1)
# Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception
$ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type
R-20, UM-1 or D-cells
% AC MAINS - inlet for power cord
^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a
TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
REMOTE CONTROL (See 1)
1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source
TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands
USB - selects USB PC LINK
AUX - selects GAME •AUX
2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set
operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if
battery powered)
3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source
or selects the repeat modes in CD source
SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random
order in CD / USB PC LINK source
MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound
4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer
level (BASS/ MID /HIGH)
5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD /
USB PC LINK playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a
MP3-CD / CD track.
TUNER: - tunes to radio stations
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
How to organize MP3 files
You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums
and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song
file sizes.
Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted.
• MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as
numbers in the display.
IMPORTANT!
This set does not play/support the following:
• Empty albums: an empty album is an album that
does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown
in the display.
• Non-supported file formats are skipped. This
means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3
files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not
be played.
• Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC,
Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer
7.0, MusicMatch.
• Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and
Package Writing.
Playing MP3-CD & CD
This CD player plays Audio Discs including
CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs.
• CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not
possible.
1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then
select CD SOURCE.
2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door.
]
is displayed when the CD door is
open.
3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press
down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door.
]Display show
,when reading disc
contents;
]Display :
if no disc inserted/
disc incorrectly inserted.,
]Display :
or
if disc damaged / dirty:.
–
throughout CD operation;
–
throughout MP3-CD operation;
– In CD stop mode: total track number and total
playback time.
POWER SUPPLY
BASIC FUNCTIONS
6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high
frequencies
WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off
GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode
7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY
As a power-saving feature, the system automatically
switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has
reached the end and no control is operated.
POWER SUPPLY
Whenever convenient, use the power supply to
conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the
power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting
batteries.
Switching on and off and selecting function
1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on.
2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your
desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or
GAME•AUX .
3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Batteries (not included) (See 1)
• Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells,
(preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity.
Remote control (See A)
• Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4
(preferably alkaline).
Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the
batteries to burst.
• Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon
zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set.
• When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old
batteries with the new ones.
• Batteries contain chemical substances, so
they should be disposed of properly.
Using AC Power
1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the
type plate located on the bottom of the set,
corresponds to your local power supply. If it does
not, consult your dealer or service center.
2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector,
adjust the selector so that it matches with the
local power supply.
3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the
set is now ready for use.
4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set
from the wall jack.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
–
is shown if you have inserted a
non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc.
Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to
read.
4. Press 2; to start playback.
=Display: Current track number and elapsed track
time during MP3-CD / CD playback.
=If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown.
5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to
resume play.
= Time digits flashes during pause.
6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9.
7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when:
– the CD door is opened
– the CD has reached the end
– you select other sound source.
MP3-CD/ CD text display
During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information:
MP3-CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– track name and elapsed track time;
– album name and elapsed track time;
– album number, track number and elapsed track
time;
– ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display
shows
.
CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback;
– Remaining playback time of current track.
Selecting a different track
• Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡
or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track
number appears in the display.
• If you have selected a track number shortly after
loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will
need to press 2; to start playback.
The type plate is located on the bottom of
the set.
BASIC FUNCTIONS
Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and
the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of
VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory.
Adjusting volume and sound (See 2)
1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control.
= Display shows the volume level
and a
number from 0-32.
2. wOOx
To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or
more to switch on / off.
= wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is
turned on.
Notes:
- wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
- Some discs might be recorded in high modulation,
which causes a distortion at high volume. If this
occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume.
3. EQUALIZER
To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press
EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME
within 3 seconds to adjust each level.
=Display briefly shows
, or
,
level (-5 to +5) or
.
Note:
1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album.
] Display:
if no albums are
available.
Finding a passage within a track
1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote
control 5 or 6).
– The CD is played at high speed and low volume.
– No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/
review.
2. When you recognize the passage you want,
release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on
the remote control 5 or 6)
Note: Searching is only possible within a track.
Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See
4 - 7)
You can select and change the various play modes
before or during playback. The play modes can also be
combined with PROGRAM.
shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are
played in random order
shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program
continuously in random order
repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program
repeat - plays the current track continuously
1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more.
(SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control).
2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position.
]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts
automatically.
3. To select normal playback, press MODE
repeatedly until the various modes are no longer
displayed.
– You can also press the 9 to cancel your play
mode in playing.
DIGITAL TUNER
2. To prevent sound interference the bass control
options operate exclusively. You cannot combine
the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx
4. GAMESOUND
To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once
or more to select your option.
=Display briefly shows
,
,
or
.
DIGITAL TUNER
1
until you have found optimal reception.
To improve radio reception:
• For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic
antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too
strong.
• For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this
antenna by turning the whole set.
HEAVY !
Take care of your CD Soundmachine.
Grip both handles when you carry or
lift the set.
Programming tuner stations:
1
Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you
play in GAME•AUX source.
You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the
memory, manually or automatically (Autostore).
2
How to MUTE the sound
1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt
sound reproduction instantly.
= Playback continues without sound and the
display flashes
.
Autostore
Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The
set will only program stations which are not in the
memory already.
1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
select the preset number .
2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate
auto store programming.
= Display:
is shown and available
stations are programmed in order of waveband
FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then
be played after all stations are stored
automatically.
2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can:
– press MUTE again;
– adjust the volume controls;
– change to another source.
DIGITAL TUNER (See 3)
Tuning to stations
1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press
SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press
TUNER once on the remote control).
= Display: shows
briefly followed by
waveband, frequency, and preset station
number if already stored.
2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select
your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control)
3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your
stations manually or by automatic search tuning:
Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote
control ) and release button when the frequency in
the display starts running.
= The radio automatically tunes to a station of
sufficient reception. Display shows
during automatic tuning.
4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the
desired station.
• To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or
6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
Programming track numbers
Program in the stop position to select and store your
CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store
any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be
stored in the memory.
1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your
desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or
™)
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the
remote control ¡ or ™).
2. Press PROG.
™ Display: program and the selected track
number
appears briefly.
™ Display :
if no track
selected for programming.
3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired
tracks.
™ Display:
if you try to program more
than 20 tracks.
4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;.
Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG
to add a current track to your program list.
Reviewing the program
In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a
while until the display shows all your stored track
numbers in sequence.
=Display
if no tracks programmed.
Erasing a program
You can erase the program by:
• pressing 9 twice;
=
displayed briefly, and program
disappears.
• pressing STANDBY ON y
• selecting another sound source
• opening the CD door.
@
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
Manual programming
1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to
stations).
2. Press PROG to activate programming.
= Display: program flashes.
1
#3
3
5
4
5
$
5. Repeat the above four steps to store other
stations.
Note : You can erase a preset station by storing
another frequency in its place.
2
4
3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station.
4. Press PROG again to confirm.
= Display shows the preset number, waveband
and the frequency of the preset station.
7
^
8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL
6
%
To listen to a preset station
Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until
the desired preset station is displayed.
GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
0
GAMESOUND (See 8)
PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND:
1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the
GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control)
=Display scrolls :
2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front
of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO
IN.
3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your
game sound option.
,
,
=Display briefly shows
or
.
Connecting other equipment to your system
Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO
OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on
a TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
USB PC LINK
Quick Setup Guide
PC system requirements
– USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP
– Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher
– CD-ROM drive
Installing MusicMatch software
1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the
USB port on your computer. (See B)
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or
more to select USB PC LINK.
3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK
installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This
application software can also be downloaded from
http://www.audio.philips.com.
IMPORTANT!
Please use this customized MusicMatch
software for your USB PC Link application.
Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch
jukebox software first from your PC system (if
available).
X
6
A
B
2 x AAA
USB
EL6095T004 / 8-02
USB PC LINK
USB PC LINK
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
GARANTIA LIMITADA
SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL
Cambio gratis por un año
Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo.
¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION?
Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el
producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando
que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante
de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo
a la mano.
¿QUE CUBRE?
La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que
usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta
fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso
con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un
producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el
período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía
original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del
producto de reemplazo.
¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA?
Su garantía no cubre:
• cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje
del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de
preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con
antena fuera de la unidad.
• reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz
de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u
otra causa no bajo el control de Philips.
• problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de
señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la
unidad.
• un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para
que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue
concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la
reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones.
• daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del
producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por
daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible
que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.
Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin
amparo de derechos de autor.)
• una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o
institucionales.
¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO?
Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con
distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países
donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de
servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo
(aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no
está fácilmente disponible).
ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO…
Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda.
Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039.
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS
EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES…
Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio.
También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y
transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante
de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación:
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía
implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y
aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en
cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto
que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la
duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación
arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.)
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL
CANADA…
Favor de comunicarse con Philips al:
1-800-661-6162 (francófono)
1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante)
(En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda
otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni
implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita
de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips
no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y
perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o
consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada,
aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.)
RECUERDE…
Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del
producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y
enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía.
Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario.
Modelo No.
________________________________
Serie No.
________________________________
4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it
does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows
Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe.
Then perform the following steps:
– Select your desired language from the list.
– Select installer driver.
– Select installer MusicMatch jukebox.
– Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies,
FAQ).
Note:
- You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial
before using it for the first time. Make sure the
volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure
sound output on the set. For optimum performance,
the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to
a low level.
5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create
your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and
dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC
into the playlist window.
Note:
-- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK,
please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)
stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit
www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates .
After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link"
for details on the USB PC LINK operations.
Enable digital CD audio output
Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is
necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows:
For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP
1. Enter the system panel menu and select
'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE',
'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and
'PROPERTIES'.
For Windows 98 SE
2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled).
Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer
to your PC's manual for correct configuration.
Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9)
The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set.
IMPORTANT!
Make sure the MusicMatch software has been
installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the
USB PC Link.
1. Turn on your set and computer .
] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and
not set to minimum / mute.
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once
or more to select USB PC LINK .
3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically
launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX.
] If the audio streaming is detected, the current
track name scrolls .
] If
scrolls for a while, check
the connection between your PC and set.
4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist
is highlighted.
5. Press 2; to start playback.
] The track time appears and the track name
scrolls once.
Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase.
6. If you want to see the track details displayed press
MODE.
During playback,
– Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all
available tracks in the playlist in random order.
– Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat
playback all the tracks in the playlist.
7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or
select another sound sources.
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0)
CD player and disc handling
• If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a
cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set
to repair.
• The lens of the CD player should never be touched!
• Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature
can cause condensation on the lens of your CD
player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not
attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a
warm environment until the moisture evaporates.
• To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the
center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free
cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may
damage the disc.
• Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it.
Safety Information
• Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity,
rain, sand or excessive heat.
• Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning
agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set.
• Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the
system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating.
• Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.
• Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus
(e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles).
If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable
to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center.
CAUTION
WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation.
circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty.
No sound /power
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
•
•
–
•
Volume not adjusted
Adjust the VOLUME
Power cord not securely connected
Connect the AC power cord properly
Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Headphones connected to the set
Disconnect headphones
Electrostatic discharge/interference
Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries
from the battery compartment. Press and hold
STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug /
replace battery supply, and try activating the set again.
When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's
volume is audible and not set to minimum.
When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer
to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output.
CD contains non-audio files
Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to
a CD audio track, instead of the data file
Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode
• Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console
Severe radio hum or noise
– Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or
computer
• Move the set to increase the distance
Remote control does not function properly
–
•
–
•
Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Distance/ angle between the set too large
Reduce the distance/ angle
Poor radio reception
– Weak radio signal
• FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial
indication
– CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized
• Use an unfinalized CD-R(W)
indication
–
•
–
•
–
•
No CD inserted
Inserted a suitable disc
CD badly scratched or dirty
Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance
Laser lens steamed up
Wait until lens has cleared
The CD skips tracks
– CD damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean CD
– shuffle or program is active
• Switch off shuffle / program
is displayed in USB PC LINK
mode for more than 10 sconds
– Check the connection between your PC and the set. If
necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to
USB PC Link for the initial setup required.
• Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the
MusicMatch software is working.
Sound skips during MP3 playback
– MP3 file made at compression level exceeding
320kbps
• Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks
into MP3 format
– Disc damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean disc
Cannot find desired MP3 title
– Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with
unsuitable text characters used
• Make sure the file names are typed in English
text characters an that the MP3 files end with
.mp3
Environmental information
We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3
materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene.
Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized
company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the
disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment.
Philips AZ2558
Tested To Comply
With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Philips Consumer Electronics North America
One Philips Drive
Knoxville TN 37914
Phone: 1-800-531-0039
az2558/17
13/5/03
12:15
Page 1
Return your Warranty Registration card today to
2558
MP3-CD Soundmachine
AZ
AZ
ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to.
Return
your Warranty
Registration Card
within 10 days
EE
CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER
RETURNING THE PRODUCT!
E
S
Philips representatives are ready to help you with
any questions about your new product.We can guide you
through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features.
We want you to start enjoying your new product right away!
RTAN
PO
• So complete and return the Warranty
Registration Card enclosed with your
purchase at once, and take advantage
of these important benefits.
T!
Need help? Call us!
IM
• Once your Philips purchase is registered,
you’re eligible to receive all the privileges
of owning a Philips product.
WH
Y INS
ID
1-800-531-0039
or
Visit us on the web at www.philips.com
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Warranty
Verification
Owner
Confirmation
Model
Registration
Registering your product
within 10 days confirms
your right to maximum
protection under the
terms and conditions of
your Philips warranty.
Your completed Warranty
Registration Card serves
as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss.
Returning your Warranty
Registration Card right
away guarantees you’ll
receive all the information
and special offers which
you qualify for as the
owner of your model.
8.
9.
Know these
safety symbols
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Model No. _______________________
Serial No. ________________________
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material
within your unit may cause
an electrical shock. For the safety of
everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
WARNING: TO PREVENT
The “exclamation point” calls
attention to features for
which you should read the
enclosed literature closely to prevent
operating and maintenance problems.
shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot, and fully insert.
FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO
NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION: To prevent electric
10.
11.
English
Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous
assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit.
• Dès que l’achat de votre appareil
Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à
tous les avantages dont bénéficient les
possesseurs des produits Philips.
Meet Philips at the Internet
• Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte
d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à
votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants.
Français
Español
Vérification
de garantie
Confirmation
de possession
Enregistrement
du modèle
Enregistrez votre produit
dans les 10 jours pour
confirmer votre droit à
une protection maximum
selon les termes et les
conditions de votre
garantie Philips.
Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie
prouve que vous possédez
l’appareil en cas de vol ou
de perte du produit.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès
aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les
informations, les offres et les
bonus auxquels vous avez
droit en tant que possesseur
de ce modèle.
AZ 2558
symboles de
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
sécurite
ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER
LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE
PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A
UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE.
Cet « éclair à pointe de
flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur
de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc
électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun,
nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le
boîtier de ce produit.
Printed in China
Canada
English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les
limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur
le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada.
Le « point d’exclamation »
attire votre attention sur des
sujets risquant de provoquer
des problèmes de fonctionnement et
d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant.
Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures :
– Relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une
3.
Respectez les avertissements.
étagère ou une table de type recom-
4.
Suivez toutes les instructions.
mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un
N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une
meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer
source d’eau.
avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci-
5.
7.
8.
12.
dent corporel si l’équipement se renver-
fon sec.
sait.
N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation.
doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps
fabricant.
prolongée.
N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de
amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur.
d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap-
Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la
pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap-
prise de terre ou prise
pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne
polarisée fournie. Une
fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute.
Prise
polarisée C.A.
IMPORTANT :
Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to
operate this device.
Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima
protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la
garantía de Philips.
Su Tarjeta de Registro de
la Garantía comprueba
que Ud. es el dueño del
aparato en caso de robo
o pérdida del producto.
La devolución inmediata de
su Tarjeta de Registro de la
Garantía le garantiza que
recibirá toda la información
y todas las promociones
especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño
de su modelo.
seguridad
dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est
blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou
dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième,
d’endommager l’appareil :
PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE
LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA
PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN
SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO.
El símbolo del «rayo» indica
que algún material no aislado
dentro de su unidad podría
resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para
la seguridad de todos, favor de no
remover la cubierta del producto.
de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement
El «signo de exclamación» le
llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud.
debe leer la información adjunta
detenidamente para evitar problemas
de funcionamiento y mantenimiento.
WHO IS COVERED?
You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product.
A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach
it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby.
WHAT IS COVERED?
Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product.
For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product
will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered
only for the original warranty period.When the warranty
on the original product expires, the warranty on the
replacement product also expires.
WHAT IS EXCLUDED?
Your warranty does not cover:
• labor charges for installation or setup of the product,
adjustment of customer controls on the product, and
installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the
product.
• product repair and/or part replacement because of
misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause
not within the control of Philips.
• reception problems caused by signal conditions or
cable or antenna systems outside the unit.
• a product that requires modification or adaptation to
enable it to operate in any country other than the
country for which it was designed, manufactured,
approved and/or authorized, or repair of products
damaged by these modifications.
• incidental or consequential damages resulting from the
product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above
exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not
limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted
or not copyrighted.)
• a product used for commercial or institutional purposes.
WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE?
You may exchange the product in all countries where the
product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries
where Philips does not distribute the product, the local
Philips service organization will attempt to provide a
replacement product (although there may be a delay if the
appropriate product is not readily available).
BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE...
Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you
have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039.
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A.,
PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS...
Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship
the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of
purchase enclosed, to the address listed below.
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the
duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do
not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may
last, this limitation may not apply to you.)
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA...
Please contact Philips at:
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking)
(In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied,
including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any
circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or
consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified
of the possibility of such damages.)
REMEMBER...
Please record below the model and serial numbers found
on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty
registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify
you if necessary.
MODEL #
__________________________________
SERIAL #
__________________________________
lines, etc.).
●
Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période.
EL 6475-F003: 02/8
Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II
Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation.
INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8.
9.
10.
11.
MAC5097
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Échange gratuite pendant un an
Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger.
QUI EST COUVERT ?
Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir
bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou
un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que
vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme
preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les
garder tous les deux à portée de main.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ?
La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où
vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette
date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas
sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit
comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit
de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période
non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du
produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de
remplacement est terminée aussi.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ?
La garantie ne couvre pas :
• les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer,
pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer
les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit.
• la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du
mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées
ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par
Philips.
• des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal,
au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité.
• un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations
pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que
le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou
autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par
de telles modifications.
• des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du
produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas
l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est
donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au
cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative,
des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les
lois sur les droits d’auteur).
• un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou
institutionnelles.
OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ?
Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit
est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où
Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service
Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais
il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas
facilement disponible).
Lea estas instrucciones.
Conserve estas instrucciones.
Lea todos los avisos.
Siga todas las instrucciones.
No utilice este aparato cerca del
agua.
Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo
un trapo seco.
No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de
acuerdo con las instrucciones del
fabricante.
No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes
de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores,
estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor.
No anule la
seguridad de la
clavija de corriente
Clavija
polarizada
(ya sea de tipo polarde CA
izado o
con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas
tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la
otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra
tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la
de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más
ancha como la toma de tierra han sido
incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad
personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el
equipo no es compatible con su toma de
corriente, consulte a un electricista para
sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta.
Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más
próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida
del equipo.
Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados
por el fabricante.
12.
Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros,
bases, trípodes, soportes o
mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el
equipo. Cuando utilice un carro,
tenga cuidado al desplazar el
conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco.
13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser
utilizado durante largo tiempo.
14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las
reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre
que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el
cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que
hubieran podido introducirse en su interior,
por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a
ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no
funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera
sufrido algún tipo de caída.
15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para
prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden
ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a
su propiedad o dañar la unidad:
● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad.
● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o
de carbono y alcalinas, etc.).
● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la
unidad durante largo tiempo.
EL 6475-S003: 02/8
Símbolo del equipo Clase II
Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento.
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
– remote control
– USB cable
– video cable
– CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers
– AC power cord
TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1)
1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack.
Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones
are connected to the set.
2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level
(BASS/ MID /HIGH)
3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off.
4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/
TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX
5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control
6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set
7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power.
8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
SEARCH ∞ , §
MP3-CD / CD :
- searches backward or forward ;
- skips to the beginning of a current track/
previous/ later track.
USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a
previous/ later track.
TUNER : - tunes to radio stations
2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
MODE :
- selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat
or shuffle order.
9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the
USB port of your computer
0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode
WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off
EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high
frequencies.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
GARANTIE LIMITÉE
AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE…
Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance.
Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au
1-800-531-0039.
POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES
ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES…
Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange.
Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec
preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous :
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie
implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude
à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie
explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces
ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite,
cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.)
POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AU CANADA…
Veuillez contacter Philips au :
1-800-661-6162 (Francophone)
1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone)
(Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute
autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle
soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite
de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est
pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit
directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents,
quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une
notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.)
RAPPEL IMPORTANT...
Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de
série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez
remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de
garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en
cas de besoin.
Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________
Nº DE SÉRIE
_____________________________
options recommandés par le fabricant.
No. de serie ______________________
sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla
ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha.
des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca-
11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou
No. de modelo ____________________
PRECAUCION: Para evitar
Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec
de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même.
Para uso del cliente:
Escriba abajo el número de serie que se
encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde
esta información para el futuro.
TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA
ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO
EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA
NI A HUMEDAD.
Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels
qu’indiqués sur l’appareil.
●
aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point
7.
ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI-
●
10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter
PRECAUCION
RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA
NO ABRIR
toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des
pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale.
MAC5097
Registro
del modelo
15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter
sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise
chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne
correspondante de la prise et pousser
jusqu’au fond.
• Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida
la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
empacada con su aparato y saque
provecho de estas ventajas importantes.
qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a
subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon
deux lames
DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les
14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel
de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des
prise polarisée est dotée de
N° de série ______________________
CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A
UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR
ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE
ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE.
13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il
Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du
chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches
9.
Utilisez uniquement un meuble
Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif-
plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre
Confirmación
del dueño
simbolos de
One Year Free Exchange
This product must be carried in for an exchange.
EL 6475-E004: 02/8
Conservez ces instructions.
N° de modèle ____________________
Verificación
de la garantía
Conozca estos
●
2.
6.
The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
●
PORTABLE AUDIO
SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE
Cet espace vous est réservé
Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé
à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir.
Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes.
• Una vez que se registre la compra de
su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a
todas las ventajas correspondientes al
dueño de un producto Philips.
●
Lisez ces instructions.
murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien
3140 115 3102.1
15.
1.
AT T E N T I O N
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
14.
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES
6.
Connaissez ces
13.
Use only with the cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer or
sold with the apparatus. When a
cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning
storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent
battery leakage which may result in bodily
injury, property damage, or damage to the
unit:
Install all batteries correctly, + and - as
marked on the unit.
Do not mix batteries (old and new or
carbon and alkaline, etc.).
Remove batteries when the unit is not
used for a long time.
Class II equipment symbol
This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system.
http://www.philips.com
W
12.
English
This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
MAC5097
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near
water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the
manufacturer´s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
Do not defeat
the safety
purpose of the
AC Polarized
polarized or
Plug
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has
two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and
a third grounding prong.The wide blade or
the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being
walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories
specified by the manufacturer.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171
IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS
Supported formats:
• Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session
CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs.
• MP3 music fomats.
• MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable
bit rate.
• 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs.
• Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels
(max. 64 characters).
General information
The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio
Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a
factor up to 10 without losing significant sound
quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of
CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM.
How to get MP3 music
Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or
convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3
encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W).
• To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at
least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files.
• Some encoder software offer an option to protect
music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the
computer which created them. If you burn such
files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this
set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option
in the encoder software before creating the music
files. In this case you are responsible for
adherence to all local or international copyrights.
When burning the MP3-CD
• To avoid problems with playback or missing files,
make sure the file names are typed in English text
characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3
• Use a writing software capable of recording MP3
track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical
order. For details on using the software, refer to
the operating instructions of the software.
• When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you
close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to
read and play your tracks.
CONTROL
PROG
MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the
programmed songs;
TUNER : - programs radio stations.
FM•AM / DISPLAY
FM•AM : - selects waveband
DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions
! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for
external audio appliance.
VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place
@ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door
BACK PANEL (See 1)
# Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception
$ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type
R-20, UM-1 or D-cells
% AC MAINS - inlet for power cord
^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a
TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
REMOTE CONTROL (See 1)
1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source
TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands
USB - selects USB PC LINK
AUX - selects GAME •AUX
2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set
operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if
battery powered)
3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source
or selects the repeat modes in CD source
SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random
order in CD / USB PC LINK source
MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound
4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer
level (BASS/ MID /HIGH)
5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD /
USB PC LINK playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a
MP3-CD / CD track.
TUNER: - tunes to radio stations
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
How to organize MP3 files
You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums
and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song
file sizes.
Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted.
• MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as
numbers in the display.
IMPORTANT!
This set does not play/support the following:
• Empty albums: an empty album is an album that
does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown
in the display.
• Non-supported file formats are skipped. This
means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3
files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not
be played.
• Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC,
Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer
7.0, MusicMatch.
• Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and
Package Writing.
Playing MP3-CD & CD
This CD player plays Audio Discs including
CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs.
• CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not
possible.
1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then
select CD SOURCE.
2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door.
]
is displayed when the CD door is
open.
3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press
down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door.
]Display show
,when reading disc
contents;
]Display :
if no disc inserted/
disc incorrectly inserted.,
]Display :
or
if disc damaged / dirty:.
–
throughout CD operation;
–
throughout MP3-CD operation;
– In CD stop mode: total track number and total
playback time.
POWER SUPPLY
BASIC FUNCTIONS
6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high
frequencies
WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off
GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode
7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY
As a power-saving feature, the system automatically
switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has
reached the end and no control is operated.
POWER SUPPLY
Whenever convenient, use the power supply to
conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the
power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting
batteries.
Switching on and off and selecting function
1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on.
2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your
desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or
GAME•AUX .
3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Batteries (not included) (See 1)
• Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells,
(preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity.
Remote control (See A)
• Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4
(preferably alkaline).
Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the
batteries to burst.
• Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon
zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set.
• When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old
batteries with the new ones.
• Batteries contain chemical substances, so
they should be disposed of properly.
Using AC Power
1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the
type plate located on the bottom of the set,
corresponds to your local power supply. If it does
not, consult your dealer or service center.
2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector,
adjust the selector so that it matches with the
local power supply.
3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the
set is now ready for use.
4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set
from the wall jack.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
–
is shown if you have inserted a
non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc.
Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to
read.
4. Press 2; to start playback.
=Display: Current track number and elapsed track
time during MP3-CD / CD playback.
=If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown.
5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to
resume play.
= Time digits flashes during pause.
6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9.
7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when:
– the CD door is opened
– the CD has reached the end
– you select other sound source.
MP3-CD/ CD text display
During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information:
MP3-CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– track name and elapsed track time;
– album name and elapsed track time;
– album number, track number and elapsed track
time;
– ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display
shows
.
CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback;
– Remaining playback time of current track.
Selecting a different track
• Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡
or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track
number appears in the display.
• If you have selected a track number shortly after
loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will
need to press 2; to start playback.
The type plate is located on the bottom of
the set.
BASIC FUNCTIONS
Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and
the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of
VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory.
Adjusting volume and sound (See 2)
1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control.
= Display shows the volume level
and a
number from 0-32.
2. wOOx
To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or
more to switch on / off.
= wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is
turned on.
Notes:
- wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
- Some discs might be recorded in high modulation,
which causes a distortion at high volume. If this
occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume.
3. EQUALIZER
To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press
EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME
within 3 seconds to adjust each level.
=Display briefly shows
, or
,
level (-5 to +5) or
.
Note:
1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album.
] Display:
if no albums are
available.
Finding a passage within a track
1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote
control 5 or 6).
– The CD is played at high speed and low volume.
– No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/
review.
2. When you recognize the passage you want,
release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on
the remote control 5 or 6)
Note: Searching is only possible within a track.
Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See
4 - 7)
You can select and change the various play modes
before or during playback. The play modes can also be
combined with PROGRAM.
shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are
played in random order
shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program
continuously in random order
repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program
repeat - plays the current track continuously
1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more.
(SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control).
2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position.
]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts
automatically.
3. To select normal playback, press MODE
repeatedly until the various modes are no longer
displayed.
– You can also press the 9 to cancel your play
mode in playing.
DIGITAL TUNER
2. To prevent sound interference the bass control
options operate exclusively. You cannot combine
the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx
4. GAMESOUND
To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once
or more to select your option.
=Display briefly shows
,
,
or
.
DIGITAL TUNER
1
until you have found optimal reception.
To improve radio reception:
• For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic
antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too
strong.
• For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this
antenna by turning the whole set.
HEAVY !
Take care of your CD Soundmachine.
Grip both handles when you carry or
lift the set.
Programming tuner stations:
1
Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you
play in GAME•AUX source.
You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the
memory, manually or automatically (Autostore).
2
How to MUTE the sound
1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt
sound reproduction instantly.
= Playback continues without sound and the
display flashes
.
Autostore
Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The
set will only program stations which are not in the
memory already.
1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
select the preset number .
2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate
auto store programming.
= Display:
is shown and available
stations are programmed in order of waveband
FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then
be played after all stations are stored
automatically.
2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can:
– press MUTE again;
– adjust the volume controls;
– change to another source.
DIGITAL TUNER (See 3)
Tuning to stations
1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press
SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press
TUNER once on the remote control).
= Display: shows
briefly followed by
waveband, frequency, and preset station
number if already stored.
2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select
your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control)
3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your
stations manually or by automatic search tuning:
Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote
control ) and release button when the frequency in
the display starts running.
= The radio automatically tunes to a station of
sufficient reception. Display shows
during automatic tuning.
4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the
desired station.
• To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or
6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
Programming track numbers
Program in the stop position to select and store your
CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store
any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be
stored in the memory.
1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your
desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or
™)
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the
remote control ¡ or ™).
2. Press PROG.
™ Display: program and the selected track
number
appears briefly.
™ Display :
if no track
selected for programming.
3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired
tracks.
™ Display:
if you try to program more
than 20 tracks.
4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;.
Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG
to add a current track to your program list.
Reviewing the program
In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a
while until the display shows all your stored track
numbers in sequence.
=Display
if no tracks programmed.
Erasing a program
You can erase the program by:
• pressing 9 twice;
=
displayed briefly, and program
disappears.
• pressing STANDBY ON y
• selecting another sound source
• opening the CD door.
@
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
Manual programming
1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to
stations).
2. Press PROG to activate programming.
= Display: program flashes.
1
#3
3
5
4
5
$
5. Repeat the above four steps to store other
stations.
Note : You can erase a preset station by storing
another frequency in its place.
2
4
3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station.
4. Press PROG again to confirm.
= Display shows the preset number, waveband
and the frequency of the preset station.
7
^
8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL
6
%
To listen to a preset station
Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until
the desired preset station is displayed.
GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
0
GAMESOUND (See 8)
PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND:
1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the
GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control)
=Display scrolls :
2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front
of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO
IN.
3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your
game sound option.
,
,
=Display briefly shows
or
.
Connecting other equipment to your system
Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO
OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on
a TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
USB PC LINK
Quick Setup Guide
PC system requirements
– USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP
– Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher
– CD-ROM drive
Installing MusicMatch software
1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the
USB port on your computer. (See B)
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or
more to select USB PC LINK.
3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK
installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This
application software can also be downloaded from
http://www.audio.philips.com.
IMPORTANT!
Please use this customized MusicMatch
software for your USB PC Link application.
Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch
jukebox software first from your PC system (if
available).
X
6
A
B
2 x AAA
USB
EL6095T004 / 8-02
USB PC LINK
USB PC LINK
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
GARANTIA LIMITADA
SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL
Cambio gratis por un año
Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo.
¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION?
Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el
producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando
que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante
de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo
a la mano.
¿QUE CUBRE?
La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que
usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta
fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso
con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un
producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el
período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía
original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del
producto de reemplazo.
¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA?
Su garantía no cubre:
• cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje
del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de
preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con
antena fuera de la unidad.
• reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz
de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u
otra causa no bajo el control de Philips.
• problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de
señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la
unidad.
• un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para
que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue
concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la
reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones.
• daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del
producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por
daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible
que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.
Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin
amparo de derechos de autor.)
• una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o
institucionales.
¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO?
Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con
distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países
donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de
servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo
(aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no
está fácilmente disponible).
ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO…
Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda.
Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039.
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS
EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES…
Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio.
También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y
transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante
de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación:
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía
implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y
aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en
cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto
que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la
duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación
arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.)
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL
CANADA…
Favor de comunicarse con Philips al:
1-800-661-6162 (francófono)
1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante)
(En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda
otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni
implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita
de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips
no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y
perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o
consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada,
aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.)
RECUERDE…
Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del
producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y
enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía.
Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario.
Modelo No.
________________________________
Serie No.
________________________________
4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it
does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows
Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe.
Then perform the following steps:
– Select your desired language from the list.
– Select installer driver.
– Select installer MusicMatch jukebox.
– Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies,
FAQ).
Note:
- You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial
before using it for the first time. Make sure the
volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure
sound output on the set. For optimum performance,
the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to
a low level.
5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create
your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and
dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC
into the playlist window.
Note:
-- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK,
please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)
stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit
www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates .
After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link"
for details on the USB PC LINK operations.
Enable digital CD audio output
Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is
necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows:
For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP
1. Enter the system panel menu and select
'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE',
'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and
'PROPERTIES'.
For Windows 98 SE
2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled).
Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer
to your PC's manual for correct configuration.
Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9)
The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set.
IMPORTANT!
Make sure the MusicMatch software has been
installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the
USB PC Link.
1. Turn on your set and computer .
] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and
not set to minimum / mute.
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once
or more to select USB PC LINK .
3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically
launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX.
] If the audio streaming is detected, the current
track name scrolls .
] If
scrolls for a while, check
the connection between your PC and set.
4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist
is highlighted.
5. Press 2; to start playback.
] The track time appears and the track name
scrolls once.
Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase.
6. If you want to see the track details displayed press
MODE.
During playback,
– Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all
available tracks in the playlist in random order.
– Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat
playback all the tracks in the playlist.
7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or
select another sound sources.
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0)
CD player and disc handling
• If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a
cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set
to repair.
• The lens of the CD player should never be touched!
• Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature
can cause condensation on the lens of your CD
player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not
attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a
warm environment until the moisture evaporates.
• To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the
center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free
cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may
damage the disc.
• Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it.
Safety Information
• Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity,
rain, sand or excessive heat.
• Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning
agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set.
• Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the
system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating.
• Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.
• Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus
(e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles).
If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable
to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center.
CAUTION
WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation.
circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty.
No sound /power
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
•
•
–
•
Volume not adjusted
Adjust the VOLUME
Power cord not securely connected
Connect the AC power cord properly
Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Headphones connected to the set
Disconnect headphones
Electrostatic discharge/interference
Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries
from the battery compartment. Press and hold
STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug /
replace battery supply, and try activating the set again.
When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's
volume is audible and not set to minimum.
When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer
to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output.
CD contains non-audio files
Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to
a CD audio track, instead of the data file
Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode
• Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console
Severe radio hum or noise
– Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or
computer
• Move the set to increase the distance
Remote control does not function properly
–
•
–
•
Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Distance/ angle between the set too large
Reduce the distance/ angle
Poor radio reception
– Weak radio signal
• FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial
indication
– CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized
• Use an unfinalized CD-R(W)
indication
–
•
–
•
–
•
No CD inserted
Inserted a suitable disc
CD badly scratched or dirty
Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance
Laser lens steamed up
Wait until lens has cleared
The CD skips tracks
– CD damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean CD
– shuffle or program is active
• Switch off shuffle / program
is displayed in USB PC LINK
mode for more than 10 sconds
– Check the connection between your PC and the set. If
necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to
USB PC Link for the initial setup required.
• Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the
MusicMatch software is working.
Sound skips during MP3 playback
– MP3 file made at compression level exceeding
320kbps
• Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks
into MP3 format
– Disc damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean disc
Cannot find desired MP3 title
– Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with
unsuitable text characters used
• Make sure the file names are typed in English
text characters an that the MP3 files end with
.mp3
Environmental information
We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3
materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene.
Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized
company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the
disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment.
Philips AZ2558
Tested To Comply
With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Philips Consumer Electronics North America
One Philips Drive
Knoxville TN 37914
Phone: 1-800-531-0039
az2558/17
13/5/03
12:15
Page 1
Return your Warranty Registration card today to
2558
MP3-CD Soundmachine
AZ
AZ
ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to.
Return
your Warranty
Registration Card
within 10 days
EE
CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER
RETURNING THE PRODUCT!
E
S
Philips representatives are ready to help you with
any questions about your new product.We can guide you
through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features.
We want you to start enjoying your new product right away!
RTAN
PO
• So complete and return the Warranty
Registration Card enclosed with your
purchase at once, and take advantage
of these important benefits.
T!
Need help? Call us!
IM
• Once your Philips purchase is registered,
you’re eligible to receive all the privileges
of owning a Philips product.
WH
Y INS
ID
1-800-531-0039
or
Visit us on the web at www.philips.com
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Warranty
Verification
Owner
Confirmation
Model
Registration
Registering your product
within 10 days confirms
your right to maximum
protection under the
terms and conditions of
your Philips warranty.
Your completed Warranty
Registration Card serves
as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss.
Returning your Warranty
Registration Card right
away guarantees you’ll
receive all the information
and special offers which
you qualify for as the
owner of your model.
8.
9.
Know these
safety symbols
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Model No. _______________________
Serial No. ________________________
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material
within your unit may cause
an electrical shock. For the safety of
everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
WARNING: TO PREVENT
The “exclamation point” calls
attention to features for
which you should read the
enclosed literature closely to prevent
operating and maintenance problems.
shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot, and fully insert.
FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO
NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION: To prevent electric
10.
11.
English
Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous
assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit.
• Dès que l’achat de votre appareil
Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à
tous les avantages dont bénéficient les
possesseurs des produits Philips.
Meet Philips at the Internet
• Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte
d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à
votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants.
Français
Español
Vérification
de garantie
Confirmation
de possession
Enregistrement
du modèle
Enregistrez votre produit
dans les 10 jours pour
confirmer votre droit à
une protection maximum
selon les termes et les
conditions de votre
garantie Philips.
Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie
prouve que vous possédez
l’appareil en cas de vol ou
de perte du produit.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès
aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les
informations, les offres et les
bonus auxquels vous avez
droit en tant que possesseur
de ce modèle.
AZ 2558
symboles de
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
sécurite
ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER
LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE
PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A
UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE.
Cet « éclair à pointe de
flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur
de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc
électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun,
nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le
boîtier de ce produit.
Printed in China
Canada
English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les
limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur
le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada.
Le « point d’exclamation »
attire votre attention sur des
sujets risquant de provoquer
des problèmes de fonctionnement et
d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant.
Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures :
– Relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une
3.
Respectez les avertissements.
étagère ou une table de type recom-
4.
Suivez toutes les instructions.
mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un
N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une
meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer
source d’eau.
avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci-
5.
7.
8.
12.
dent corporel si l’équipement se renver-
fon sec.
sait.
N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation.
doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps
fabricant.
prolongée.
N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de
amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur.
d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap-
Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la
pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap-
prise de terre ou prise
pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne
polarisée fournie. Une
fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute.
Prise
polarisée C.A.
IMPORTANT :
Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to
operate this device.
Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima
protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la
garantía de Philips.
Su Tarjeta de Registro de
la Garantía comprueba
que Ud. es el dueño del
aparato en caso de robo
o pérdida del producto.
La devolución inmediata de
su Tarjeta de Registro de la
Garantía le garantiza que
recibirá toda la información
y todas las promociones
especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño
de su modelo.
seguridad
dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est
blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou
dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième,
d’endommager l’appareil :
PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE
LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA
PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN
SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO.
El símbolo del «rayo» indica
que algún material no aislado
dentro de su unidad podría
resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para
la seguridad de todos, favor de no
remover la cubierta del producto.
de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement
El «signo de exclamación» le
llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud.
debe leer la información adjunta
detenidamente para evitar problemas
de funcionamiento y mantenimiento.
WHO IS COVERED?
You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product.
A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach
it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby.
WHAT IS COVERED?
Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product.
For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product
will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered
only for the original warranty period.When the warranty
on the original product expires, the warranty on the
replacement product also expires.
WHAT IS EXCLUDED?
Your warranty does not cover:
• labor charges for installation or setup of the product,
adjustment of customer controls on the product, and
installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the
product.
• product repair and/or part replacement because of
misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause
not within the control of Philips.
• reception problems caused by signal conditions or
cable or antenna systems outside the unit.
• a product that requires modification or adaptation to
enable it to operate in any country other than the
country for which it was designed, manufactured,
approved and/or authorized, or repair of products
damaged by these modifications.
• incidental or consequential damages resulting from the
product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above
exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not
limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted
or not copyrighted.)
• a product used for commercial or institutional purposes.
WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE?
You may exchange the product in all countries where the
product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries
where Philips does not distribute the product, the local
Philips service organization will attempt to provide a
replacement product (although there may be a delay if the
appropriate product is not readily available).
BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE...
Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you
have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039.
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A.,
PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS...
Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship
the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of
purchase enclosed, to the address listed below.
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the
duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do
not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may
last, this limitation may not apply to you.)
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA...
Please contact Philips at:
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking)
(In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied,
including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any
circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or
consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified
of the possibility of such damages.)
REMEMBER...
Please record below the model and serial numbers found
on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty
registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify
you if necessary.
MODEL #
__________________________________
SERIAL #
__________________________________
lines, etc.).
●
Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période.
EL 6475-F003: 02/8
Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II
Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation.
INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8.
9.
10.
11.
MAC5097
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Échange gratuite pendant un an
Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger.
QUI EST COUVERT ?
Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir
bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou
un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que
vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme
preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les
garder tous les deux à portée de main.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ?
La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où
vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette
date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas
sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit
comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit
de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période
non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du
produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de
remplacement est terminée aussi.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ?
La garantie ne couvre pas :
• les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer,
pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer
les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit.
• la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du
mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées
ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par
Philips.
• des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal,
au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité.
• un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations
pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que
le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou
autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par
de telles modifications.
• des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du
produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas
l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est
donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au
cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative,
des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les
lois sur les droits d’auteur).
• un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou
institutionnelles.
OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ?
Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit
est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où
Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service
Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais
il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas
facilement disponible).
Lea estas instrucciones.
Conserve estas instrucciones.
Lea todos los avisos.
Siga todas las instrucciones.
No utilice este aparato cerca del
agua.
Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo
un trapo seco.
No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de
acuerdo con las instrucciones del
fabricante.
No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes
de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores,
estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor.
No anule la
seguridad de la
clavija de corriente
Clavija
polarizada
(ya sea de tipo polarde CA
izado o
con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas
tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la
otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra
tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la
de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más
ancha como la toma de tierra han sido
incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad
personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el
equipo no es compatible con su toma de
corriente, consulte a un electricista para
sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta.
Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más
próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida
del equipo.
Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados
por el fabricante.
12.
Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros,
bases, trípodes, soportes o
mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el
equipo. Cuando utilice un carro,
tenga cuidado al desplazar el
conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco.
13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser
utilizado durante largo tiempo.
14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las
reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre
que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el
cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que
hubieran podido introducirse en su interior,
por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a
ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no
funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera
sufrido algún tipo de caída.
15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para
prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden
ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a
su propiedad o dañar la unidad:
● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad.
● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o
de carbono y alcalinas, etc.).
● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la
unidad durante largo tiempo.
EL 6475-S003: 02/8
Símbolo del equipo Clase II
Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento.
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
– remote control
– USB cable
– video cable
– CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers
– AC power cord
TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1)
1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack.
Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones
are connected to the set.
2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level
(BASS/ MID /HIGH)
3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off.
4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/
TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX
5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control
6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set
7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power.
8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
SEARCH ∞ , §
MP3-CD / CD :
- searches backward or forward ;
- skips to the beginning of a current track/
previous/ later track.
USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a
previous/ later track.
TUNER : - tunes to radio stations
2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
MODE :
- selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat
or shuffle order.
9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the
USB port of your computer
0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode
WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off
EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high
frequencies.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
GARANTIE LIMITÉE
AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE…
Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance.
Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au
1-800-531-0039.
POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES
ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES…
Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange.
Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec
preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous :
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie
implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude
à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie
explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces
ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite,
cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.)
POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AU CANADA…
Veuillez contacter Philips au :
1-800-661-6162 (Francophone)
1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone)
(Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute
autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle
soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite
de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est
pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit
directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents,
quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une
notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.)
RAPPEL IMPORTANT...
Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de
série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez
remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de
garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en
cas de besoin.
Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________
Nº DE SÉRIE
_____________________________
options recommandés par le fabricant.
No. de serie ______________________
sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla
ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha.
des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca-
11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou
No. de modelo ____________________
PRECAUCION: Para evitar
Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec
de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même.
Para uso del cliente:
Escriba abajo el número de serie que se
encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde
esta información para el futuro.
TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA
ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO
EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA
NI A HUMEDAD.
Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels
qu’indiqués sur l’appareil.
●
aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point
7.
ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI-
●
10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter
PRECAUCION
RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA
NO ABRIR
toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des
pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale.
MAC5097
Registro
del modelo
15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter
sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise
chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne
correspondante de la prise et pousser
jusqu’au fond.
• Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida
la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
empacada con su aparato y saque
provecho de estas ventajas importantes.
qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a
subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon
deux lames
DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les
14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel
de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des
prise polarisée est dotée de
N° de série ______________________
CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A
UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR
ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE
ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE.
13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il
Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du
chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches
9.
Utilisez uniquement un meuble
Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif-
plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre
Confirmación
del dueño
simbolos de
One Year Free Exchange
This product must be carried in for an exchange.
EL 6475-E004: 02/8
Conservez ces instructions.
N° de modèle ____________________
Verificación
de la garantía
Conozca estos
●
2.
6.
The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
●
PORTABLE AUDIO
SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE
Cet espace vous est réservé
Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé
à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir.
Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes.
• Una vez que se registre la compra de
su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a
todas las ventajas correspondientes al
dueño de un producto Philips.
●
Lisez ces instructions.
murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien
3140 115 3102.1
15.
1.
AT T E N T I O N
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
14.
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES
6.
Connaissez ces
13.
Use only with the cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer or
sold with the apparatus. When a
cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning
storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent
battery leakage which may result in bodily
injury, property damage, or damage to the
unit:
Install all batteries correctly, + and - as
marked on the unit.
Do not mix batteries (old and new or
carbon and alkaline, etc.).
Remove batteries when the unit is not
used for a long time.
Class II equipment symbol
This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system.
http://www.philips.com
W
12.
English
This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
MAC5097
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near
water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the
manufacturer´s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
Do not defeat
the safety
purpose of the
AC Polarized
polarized or
Plug
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has
two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and
a third grounding prong.The wide blade or
the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being
walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories
specified by the manufacturer.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171
IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS
Supported formats:
• Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session
CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs.
• MP3 music fomats.
• MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable
bit rate.
• 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs.
• Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels
(max. 64 characters).
General information
The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio
Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a
factor up to 10 without losing significant sound
quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of
CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM.
How to get MP3 music
Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or
convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3
encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W).
• To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at
least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files.
• Some encoder software offer an option to protect
music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the
computer which created them. If you burn such
files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this
set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option
in the encoder software before creating the music
files. In this case you are responsible for
adherence to all local or international copyrights.
When burning the MP3-CD
• To avoid problems with playback or missing files,
make sure the file names are typed in English text
characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3
• Use a writing software capable of recording MP3
track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical
order. For details on using the software, refer to
the operating instructions of the software.
• When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you
close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to
read and play your tracks.
CONTROL
PROG
MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the
programmed songs;
TUNER : - programs radio stations.
FM•AM / DISPLAY
FM•AM : - selects waveband
DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions
! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for
external audio appliance.
VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place
@ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door
BACK PANEL (See 1)
# Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception
$ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type
R-20, UM-1 or D-cells
% AC MAINS - inlet for power cord
^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a
TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
REMOTE CONTROL (See 1)
1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source
TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands
USB - selects USB PC LINK
AUX - selects GAME •AUX
2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set
operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if
battery powered)
3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source
or selects the repeat modes in CD source
SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random
order in CD / USB PC LINK source
MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound
4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer
level (BASS/ MID /HIGH)
5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD /
USB PC LINK playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a
MP3-CD / CD track.
TUNER: - tunes to radio stations
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
How to organize MP3 files
You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums
and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song
file sizes.
Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted.
• MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as
numbers in the display.
IMPORTANT!
This set does not play/support the following:
• Empty albums: an empty album is an album that
does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown
in the display.
• Non-supported file formats are skipped. This
means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3
files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not
be played.
• Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC,
Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer
7.0, MusicMatch.
• Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and
Package Writing.
Playing MP3-CD & CD
This CD player plays Audio Discs including
CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs.
• CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not
possible.
1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then
select CD SOURCE.
2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door.
]
is displayed when the CD door is
open.
3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press
down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door.
]Display show
,when reading disc
contents;
]Display :
if no disc inserted/
disc incorrectly inserted.,
]Display :
or
if disc damaged / dirty:.
–
throughout CD operation;
–
throughout MP3-CD operation;
– In CD stop mode: total track number and total
playback time.
POWER SUPPLY
BASIC FUNCTIONS
6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high
frequencies
WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off
GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode
7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY
As a power-saving feature, the system automatically
switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has
reached the end and no control is operated.
POWER SUPPLY
Whenever convenient, use the power supply to
conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the
power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting
batteries.
Switching on and off and selecting function
1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on.
2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your
desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or
GAME•AUX .
3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Batteries (not included) (See 1)
• Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells,
(preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity.
Remote control (See A)
• Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4
(preferably alkaline).
Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the
batteries to burst.
• Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon
zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set.
• When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old
batteries with the new ones.
• Batteries contain chemical substances, so
they should be disposed of properly.
Using AC Power
1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the
type plate located on the bottom of the set,
corresponds to your local power supply. If it does
not, consult your dealer or service center.
2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector,
adjust the selector so that it matches with the
local power supply.
3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the
set is now ready for use.
4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set
from the wall jack.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
–
is shown if you have inserted a
non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc.
Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to
read.
4. Press 2; to start playback.
=Display: Current track number and elapsed track
time during MP3-CD / CD playback.
=If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown.
5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to
resume play.
= Time digits flashes during pause.
6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9.
7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when:
– the CD door is opened
– the CD has reached the end
– you select other sound source.
MP3-CD/ CD text display
During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information:
MP3-CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– track name and elapsed track time;
– album name and elapsed track time;
– album number, track number and elapsed track
time;
– ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display
shows
.
CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback;
– Remaining playback time of current track.
Selecting a different track
• Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡
or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track
number appears in the display.
• If you have selected a track number shortly after
loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will
need to press 2; to start playback.
The type plate is located on the bottom of
the set.
BASIC FUNCTIONS
Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and
the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of
VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory.
Adjusting volume and sound (See 2)
1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control.
= Display shows the volume level
and a
number from 0-32.
2. wOOx
To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or
more to switch on / off.
= wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is
turned on.
Notes:
- wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
- Some discs might be recorded in high modulation,
which causes a distortion at high volume. If this
occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume.
3. EQUALIZER
To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press
EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME
within 3 seconds to adjust each level.
=Display briefly shows
, or
,
level (-5 to +5) or
.
Note:
1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album.
] Display:
if no albums are
available.
Finding a passage within a track
1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote
control 5 or 6).
– The CD is played at high speed and low volume.
– No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/
review.
2. When you recognize the passage you want,
release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on
the remote control 5 or 6)
Note: Searching is only possible within a track.
Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See
4 - 7)
You can select and change the various play modes
before or during playback. The play modes can also be
combined with PROGRAM.
shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are
played in random order
shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program
continuously in random order
repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program
repeat - plays the current track continuously
1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more.
(SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control).
2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position.
]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts
automatically.
3. To select normal playback, press MODE
repeatedly until the various modes are no longer
displayed.
– You can also press the 9 to cancel your play
mode in playing.
DIGITAL TUNER
2. To prevent sound interference the bass control
options operate exclusively. You cannot combine
the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx
4. GAMESOUND
To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once
or more to select your option.
=Display briefly shows
,
,
or
.
DIGITAL TUNER
1
until you have found optimal reception.
To improve radio reception:
• For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic
antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too
strong.
• For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this
antenna by turning the whole set.
HEAVY !
Take care of your CD Soundmachine.
Grip both handles when you carry or
lift the set.
Programming tuner stations:
1
Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you
play in GAME•AUX source.
You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the
memory, manually or automatically (Autostore).
2
How to MUTE the sound
1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt
sound reproduction instantly.
= Playback continues without sound and the
display flashes
.
Autostore
Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The
set will only program stations which are not in the
memory already.
1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
select the preset number .
2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate
auto store programming.
= Display:
is shown and available
stations are programmed in order of waveband
FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then
be played after all stations are stored
automatically.
2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can:
– press MUTE again;
– adjust the volume controls;
– change to another source.
DIGITAL TUNER (See 3)
Tuning to stations
1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press
SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press
TUNER once on the remote control).
= Display: shows
briefly followed by
waveband, frequency, and preset station
number if already stored.
2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select
your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control)
3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your
stations manually or by automatic search tuning:
Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote
control ) and release button when the frequency in
the display starts running.
= The radio automatically tunes to a station of
sufficient reception. Display shows
during automatic tuning.
4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the
desired station.
• To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or
6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
Programming track numbers
Program in the stop position to select and store your
CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store
any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be
stored in the memory.
1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your
desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or
™)
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the
remote control ¡ or ™).
2. Press PROG.
™ Display: program and the selected track
number
appears briefly.
™ Display :
if no track
selected for programming.
3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired
tracks.
™ Display:
if you try to program more
than 20 tracks.
4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;.
Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG
to add a current track to your program list.
Reviewing the program
In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a
while until the display shows all your stored track
numbers in sequence.
=Display
if no tracks programmed.
Erasing a program
You can erase the program by:
• pressing 9 twice;
=
displayed briefly, and program
disappears.
• pressing STANDBY ON y
• selecting another sound source
• opening the CD door.
@
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
Manual programming
1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to
stations).
2. Press PROG to activate programming.
= Display: program flashes.
1
#3
3
5
4
5
$
5. Repeat the above four steps to store other
stations.
Note : You can erase a preset station by storing
another frequency in its place.
2
4
3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station.
4. Press PROG again to confirm.
= Display shows the preset number, waveband
and the frequency of the preset station.
7
^
8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL
6
%
To listen to a preset station
Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until
the desired preset station is displayed.
GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
0
GAMESOUND (See 8)
PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND:
1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the
GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control)
=Display scrolls :
2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front
of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO
IN.
3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your
game sound option.
,
,
=Display briefly shows
or
.
Connecting other equipment to your system
Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO
OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on
a TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
USB PC LINK
Quick Setup Guide
PC system requirements
– USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP
– Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher
– CD-ROM drive
Installing MusicMatch software
1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the
USB port on your computer. (See B)
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or
more to select USB PC LINK.
3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK
installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This
application software can also be downloaded from
http://www.audio.philips.com.
IMPORTANT!
Please use this customized MusicMatch
software for your USB PC Link application.
Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch
jukebox software first from your PC system (if
available).
X
6
A
B
2 x AAA
USB
EL6095T004 / 8-02
USB PC LINK
USB PC LINK
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
GARANTIA LIMITADA
SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL
Cambio gratis por un año
Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo.
¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION?
Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el
producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando
que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante
de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo
a la mano.
¿QUE CUBRE?
La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que
usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta
fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso
con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un
producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el
período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía
original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del
producto de reemplazo.
¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA?
Su garantía no cubre:
• cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje
del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de
preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con
antena fuera de la unidad.
• reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz
de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u
otra causa no bajo el control de Philips.
• problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de
señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la
unidad.
• un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para
que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue
concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la
reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones.
• daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del
producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por
daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible
que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.
Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin
amparo de derechos de autor.)
• una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o
institucionales.
¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO?
Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con
distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países
donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de
servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo
(aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no
está fácilmente disponible).
ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO…
Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda.
Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039.
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS
EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES…
Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio.
También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y
transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante
de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación:
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía
implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y
aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en
cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto
que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la
duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación
arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.)
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL
CANADA…
Favor de comunicarse con Philips al:
1-800-661-6162 (francófono)
1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante)
(En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda
otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni
implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita
de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips
no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y
perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o
consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada,
aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.)
RECUERDE…
Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del
producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y
enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía.
Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario.
Modelo No.
________________________________
Serie No.
________________________________
4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it
does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows
Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe.
Then perform the following steps:
– Select your desired language from the list.
– Select installer driver.
– Select installer MusicMatch jukebox.
– Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies,
FAQ).
Note:
- You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial
before using it for the first time. Make sure the
volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure
sound output on the set. For optimum performance,
the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to
a low level.
5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create
your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and
dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC
into the playlist window.
Note:
-- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK,
please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)
stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit
www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates .
After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link"
for details on the USB PC LINK operations.
Enable digital CD audio output
Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is
necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows:
For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP
1. Enter the system panel menu and select
'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE',
'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and
'PROPERTIES'.
For Windows 98 SE
2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled).
Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer
to your PC's manual for correct configuration.
Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9)
The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set.
IMPORTANT!
Make sure the MusicMatch software has been
installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the
USB PC Link.
1. Turn on your set and computer .
] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and
not set to minimum / mute.
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once
or more to select USB PC LINK .
3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically
launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX.
] If the audio streaming is detected, the current
track name scrolls .
] If
scrolls for a while, check
the connection between your PC and set.
4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist
is highlighted.
5. Press 2; to start playback.
] The track time appears and the track name
scrolls once.
Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase.
6. If you want to see the track details displayed press
MODE.
During playback,
– Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all
available tracks in the playlist in random order.
– Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat
playback all the tracks in the playlist.
7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or
select another sound sources.
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0)
CD player and disc handling
• If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a
cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set
to repair.
• The lens of the CD player should never be touched!
• Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature
can cause condensation on the lens of your CD
player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not
attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a
warm environment until the moisture evaporates.
• To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the
center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free
cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may
damage the disc.
• Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it.
Safety Information
• Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity,
rain, sand or excessive heat.
• Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning
agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set.
• Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the
system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating.
• Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.
• Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus
(e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles).
If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable
to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center.
CAUTION
WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation.
circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty.
No sound /power
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
•
•
–
•
Volume not adjusted
Adjust the VOLUME
Power cord not securely connected
Connect the AC power cord properly
Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Headphones connected to the set
Disconnect headphones
Electrostatic discharge/interference
Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries
from the battery compartment. Press and hold
STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug /
replace battery supply, and try activating the set again.
When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's
volume is audible and not set to minimum.
When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer
to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output.
CD contains non-audio files
Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to
a CD audio track, instead of the data file
Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode
• Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console
Severe radio hum or noise
– Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or
computer
• Move the set to increase the distance
Remote control does not function properly
–
•
–
•
Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Distance/ angle between the set too large
Reduce the distance/ angle
Poor radio reception
– Weak radio signal
• FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial
indication
– CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized
• Use an unfinalized CD-R(W)
indication
–
•
–
•
–
•
No CD inserted
Inserted a suitable disc
CD badly scratched or dirty
Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance
Laser lens steamed up
Wait until lens has cleared
The CD skips tracks
– CD damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean CD
– shuffle or program is active
• Switch off shuffle / program
is displayed in USB PC LINK
mode for more than 10 sconds
– Check the connection between your PC and the set. If
necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to
USB PC Link for the initial setup required.
• Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the
MusicMatch software is working.
Sound skips during MP3 playback
– MP3 file made at compression level exceeding
320kbps
• Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks
into MP3 format
– Disc damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean disc
Cannot find desired MP3 title
– Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with
unsuitable text characters used
• Make sure the file names are typed in English
text characters an that the MP3 files end with
.mp3
Environmental information
We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3
materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene.
Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized
company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the
disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment.
Philips AZ2558
Tested To Comply
With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Philips Consumer Electronics North America
One Philips Drive
Knoxville TN 37914
Phone: 1-800-531-0039
az2558/17
13/5/03
12:15
Page 1
Return your Warranty Registration card today to
2558
MP3-CD Soundmachine
AZ
AZ
ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to.
Return
your Warranty
Registration Card
within 10 days
EE
CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER
RETURNING THE PRODUCT!
E
S
Philips representatives are ready to help you with
any questions about your new product.We can guide you
through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features.
We want you to start enjoying your new product right away!
RTAN
PO
• So complete and return the Warranty
Registration Card enclosed with your
purchase at once, and take advantage
of these important benefits.
T!
Need help? Call us!
IM
• Once your Philips purchase is registered,
you’re eligible to receive all the privileges
of owning a Philips product.
WH
Y INS
ID
1-800-531-0039
or
Visit us on the web at www.philips.com
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Warranty
Verification
Owner
Confirmation
Model
Registration
Registering your product
within 10 days confirms
your right to maximum
protection under the
terms and conditions of
your Philips warranty.
Your completed Warranty
Registration Card serves
as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss.
Returning your Warranty
Registration Card right
away guarantees you’ll
receive all the information
and special offers which
you qualify for as the
owner of your model.
8.
9.
Know these
safety symbols
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Model No. _______________________
Serial No. ________________________
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material
within your unit may cause
an electrical shock. For the safety of
everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
WARNING: TO PREVENT
The “exclamation point” calls
attention to features for
which you should read the
enclosed literature closely to prevent
operating and maintenance problems.
shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot, and fully insert.
FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO
NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION: To prevent electric
10.
11.
English
Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous
assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit.
• Dès que l’achat de votre appareil
Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à
tous les avantages dont bénéficient les
possesseurs des produits Philips.
Meet Philips at the Internet
• Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte
d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à
votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants.
Français
Español
Vérification
de garantie
Confirmation
de possession
Enregistrement
du modèle
Enregistrez votre produit
dans les 10 jours pour
confirmer votre droit à
une protection maximum
selon les termes et les
conditions de votre
garantie Philips.
Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie
prouve que vous possédez
l’appareil en cas de vol ou
de perte du produit.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès
aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les
informations, les offres et les
bonus auxquels vous avez
droit en tant que possesseur
de ce modèle.
AZ 2558
symboles de
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
sécurite
ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER
LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE
PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A
UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE.
Cet « éclair à pointe de
flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur
de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc
électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun,
nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le
boîtier de ce produit.
Printed in China
Canada
English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les
limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur
le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada.
Le « point d’exclamation »
attire votre attention sur des
sujets risquant de provoquer
des problèmes de fonctionnement et
d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant.
Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures :
– Relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une
3.
Respectez les avertissements.
étagère ou une table de type recom-
4.
Suivez toutes les instructions.
mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un
N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une
meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer
source d’eau.
avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci-
5.
7.
8.
12.
dent corporel si l’équipement se renver-
fon sec.
sait.
N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation.
doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps
fabricant.
prolongée.
N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de
amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur.
d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap-
Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la
pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap-
prise de terre ou prise
pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne
polarisée fournie. Une
fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute.
Prise
polarisée C.A.
IMPORTANT :
Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to
operate this device.
Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima
protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la
garantía de Philips.
Su Tarjeta de Registro de
la Garantía comprueba
que Ud. es el dueño del
aparato en caso de robo
o pérdida del producto.
La devolución inmediata de
su Tarjeta de Registro de la
Garantía le garantiza que
recibirá toda la información
y todas las promociones
especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño
de su modelo.
seguridad
dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est
blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou
dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième,
d’endommager l’appareil :
PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE
LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA
PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN
SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO.
El símbolo del «rayo» indica
que algún material no aislado
dentro de su unidad podría
resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para
la seguridad de todos, favor de no
remover la cubierta del producto.
de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement
El «signo de exclamación» le
llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud.
debe leer la información adjunta
detenidamente para evitar problemas
de funcionamiento y mantenimiento.
WHO IS COVERED?
You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product.
A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach
it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby.
WHAT IS COVERED?
Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product.
For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product
will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered
only for the original warranty period.When the warranty
on the original product expires, the warranty on the
replacement product also expires.
WHAT IS EXCLUDED?
Your warranty does not cover:
• labor charges for installation or setup of the product,
adjustment of customer controls on the product, and
installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the
product.
• product repair and/or part replacement because of
misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause
not within the control of Philips.
• reception problems caused by signal conditions or
cable or antenna systems outside the unit.
• a product that requires modification or adaptation to
enable it to operate in any country other than the
country for which it was designed, manufactured,
approved and/or authorized, or repair of products
damaged by these modifications.
• incidental or consequential damages resulting from the
product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above
exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not
limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted
or not copyrighted.)
• a product used for commercial or institutional purposes.
WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE?
You may exchange the product in all countries where the
product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries
where Philips does not distribute the product, the local
Philips service organization will attempt to provide a
replacement product (although there may be a delay if the
appropriate product is not readily available).
BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE...
Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you
have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039.
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A.,
PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS...
Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship
the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of
purchase enclosed, to the address listed below.
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the
duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do
not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may
last, this limitation may not apply to you.)
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA...
Please contact Philips at:
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking)
(In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied,
including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any
circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or
consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified
of the possibility of such damages.)
REMEMBER...
Please record below the model and serial numbers found
on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty
registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify
you if necessary.
MODEL #
__________________________________
SERIAL #
__________________________________
lines, etc.).
●
Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période.
EL 6475-F003: 02/8
Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II
Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation.
INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8.
9.
10.
11.
MAC5097
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Échange gratuite pendant un an
Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger.
QUI EST COUVERT ?
Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir
bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou
un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que
vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme
preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les
garder tous les deux à portée de main.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ?
La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où
vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette
date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas
sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit
comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit
de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période
non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du
produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de
remplacement est terminée aussi.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ?
La garantie ne couvre pas :
• les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer,
pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer
les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit.
• la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du
mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées
ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par
Philips.
• des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal,
au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité.
• un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations
pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que
le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou
autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par
de telles modifications.
• des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du
produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas
l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est
donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au
cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative,
des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les
lois sur les droits d’auteur).
• un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou
institutionnelles.
OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ?
Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit
est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où
Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service
Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais
il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas
facilement disponible).
Lea estas instrucciones.
Conserve estas instrucciones.
Lea todos los avisos.
Siga todas las instrucciones.
No utilice este aparato cerca del
agua.
Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo
un trapo seco.
No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de
acuerdo con las instrucciones del
fabricante.
No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes
de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores,
estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor.
No anule la
seguridad de la
clavija de corriente
Clavija
polarizada
(ya sea de tipo polarde CA
izado o
con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas
tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la
otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra
tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la
de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más
ancha como la toma de tierra han sido
incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad
personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el
equipo no es compatible con su toma de
corriente, consulte a un electricista para
sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta.
Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más
próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida
del equipo.
Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados
por el fabricante.
12.
Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros,
bases, trípodes, soportes o
mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el
equipo. Cuando utilice un carro,
tenga cuidado al desplazar el
conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco.
13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser
utilizado durante largo tiempo.
14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las
reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre
que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el
cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que
hubieran podido introducirse en su interior,
por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a
ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no
funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera
sufrido algún tipo de caída.
15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para
prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden
ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a
su propiedad o dañar la unidad:
● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad.
● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o
de carbono y alcalinas, etc.).
● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la
unidad durante largo tiempo.
EL 6475-S003: 02/8
Símbolo del equipo Clase II
Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento.
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
– remote control
– USB cable
– video cable
– CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers
– AC power cord
TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1)
1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack.
Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones
are connected to the set.
2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level
(BASS/ MID /HIGH)
3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off.
4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/
TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX
5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control
6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set
7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power.
8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
SEARCH ∞ , §
MP3-CD / CD :
- searches backward or forward ;
- skips to the beginning of a current track/
previous/ later track.
USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a
previous/ later track.
TUNER : - tunes to radio stations
2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
MODE :
- selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat
or shuffle order.
9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the
USB port of your computer
0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode
WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off
EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high
frequencies.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
GARANTIE LIMITÉE
AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE…
Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance.
Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au
1-800-531-0039.
POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES
ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES…
Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange.
Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec
preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous :
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie
implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude
à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie
explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces
ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite,
cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.)
POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AU CANADA…
Veuillez contacter Philips au :
1-800-661-6162 (Francophone)
1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone)
(Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute
autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle
soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite
de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est
pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit
directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents,
quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une
notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.)
RAPPEL IMPORTANT...
Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de
série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez
remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de
garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en
cas de besoin.
Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________
Nº DE SÉRIE
_____________________________
options recommandés par le fabricant.
No. de serie ______________________
sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla
ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha.
des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca-
11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou
No. de modelo ____________________
PRECAUCION: Para evitar
Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec
de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même.
Para uso del cliente:
Escriba abajo el número de serie que se
encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde
esta información para el futuro.
TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA
ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO
EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA
NI A HUMEDAD.
Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels
qu’indiqués sur l’appareil.
●
aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point
7.
ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI-
●
10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter
PRECAUCION
RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA
NO ABRIR
toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des
pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale.
MAC5097
Registro
del modelo
15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter
sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise
chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne
correspondante de la prise et pousser
jusqu’au fond.
• Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida
la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
empacada con su aparato y saque
provecho de estas ventajas importantes.
qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a
subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon
deux lames
DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les
14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel
de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des
prise polarisée est dotée de
N° de série ______________________
CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A
UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR
ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE
ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE.
13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il
Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du
chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches
9.
Utilisez uniquement un meuble
Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif-
plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre
Confirmación
del dueño
simbolos de
One Year Free Exchange
This product must be carried in for an exchange.
EL 6475-E004: 02/8
Conservez ces instructions.
N° de modèle ____________________
Verificación
de la garantía
Conozca estos
●
2.
6.
The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
●
PORTABLE AUDIO
SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE
Cet espace vous est réservé
Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé
à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir.
Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes.
• Una vez que se registre la compra de
su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a
todas las ventajas correspondientes al
dueño de un producto Philips.
●
Lisez ces instructions.
murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien
3140 115 3102.1
15.
1.
AT T E N T I O N
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
14.
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES
6.
Connaissez ces
13.
Use only with the cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer or
sold with the apparatus. When a
cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning
storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent
battery leakage which may result in bodily
injury, property damage, or damage to the
unit:
Install all batteries correctly, + and - as
marked on the unit.
Do not mix batteries (old and new or
carbon and alkaline, etc.).
Remove batteries when the unit is not
used for a long time.
Class II equipment symbol
This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system.
http://www.philips.com
W
12.
English
This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
MAC5097
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near
water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the
manufacturer´s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
Do not defeat
the safety
purpose of the
AC Polarized
polarized or
Plug
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has
two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and
a third grounding prong.The wide blade or
the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being
walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories
specified by the manufacturer.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171
IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS
Supported formats:
• Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session
CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs.
• MP3 music fomats.
• MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable
bit rate.
• 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs.
• Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels
(max. 64 characters).
General information
The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio
Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a
factor up to 10 without losing significant sound
quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of
CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM.
How to get MP3 music
Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or
convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3
encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W).
• To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at
least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files.
• Some encoder software offer an option to protect
music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the
computer which created them. If you burn such
files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this
set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option
in the encoder software before creating the music
files. In this case you are responsible for
adherence to all local or international copyrights.
When burning the MP3-CD
• To avoid problems with playback or missing files,
make sure the file names are typed in English text
characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3
• Use a writing software capable of recording MP3
track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical
order. For details on using the software, refer to
the operating instructions of the software.
• When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you
close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to
read and play your tracks.
CONTROL
PROG
MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the
programmed songs;
TUNER : - programs radio stations.
FM•AM / DISPLAY
FM•AM : - selects waveband
DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions
! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for
external audio appliance.
VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place
@ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door
BACK PANEL (See 1)
# Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception
$ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type
R-20, UM-1 or D-cells
% AC MAINS - inlet for power cord
^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a
TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
REMOTE CONTROL (See 1)
1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source
TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands
USB - selects USB PC LINK
AUX - selects GAME •AUX
2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set
operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if
battery powered)
3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source
or selects the repeat modes in CD source
SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random
order in CD / USB PC LINK source
MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound
4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer
level (BASS/ MID /HIGH)
5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD /
USB PC LINK playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a
MP3-CD / CD track.
TUNER: - tunes to radio stations
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
How to organize MP3 files
You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums
and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song
file sizes.
Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted.
• MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as
numbers in the display.
IMPORTANT!
This set does not play/support the following:
• Empty albums: an empty album is an album that
does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown
in the display.
• Non-supported file formats are skipped. This
means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3
files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not
be played.
• Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC,
Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer
7.0, MusicMatch.
• Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and
Package Writing.
Playing MP3-CD & CD
This CD player plays Audio Discs including
CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs.
• CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not
possible.
1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then
select CD SOURCE.
2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door.
]
is displayed when the CD door is
open.
3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press
down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door.
]Display show
,when reading disc
contents;
]Display :
if no disc inserted/
disc incorrectly inserted.,
]Display :
or
if disc damaged / dirty:.
–
throughout CD operation;
–
throughout MP3-CD operation;
– In CD stop mode: total track number and total
playback time.
POWER SUPPLY
BASIC FUNCTIONS
6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high
frequencies
WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off
GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode
7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY
As a power-saving feature, the system automatically
switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has
reached the end and no control is operated.
POWER SUPPLY
Whenever convenient, use the power supply to
conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the
power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting
batteries.
Switching on and off and selecting function
1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on.
2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your
desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or
GAME•AUX .
3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Batteries (not included) (See 1)
• Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells,
(preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity.
Remote control (See A)
• Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4
(preferably alkaline).
Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the
batteries to burst.
• Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon
zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set.
• When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old
batteries with the new ones.
• Batteries contain chemical substances, so
they should be disposed of properly.
Using AC Power
1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the
type plate located on the bottom of the set,
corresponds to your local power supply. If it does
not, consult your dealer or service center.
2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector,
adjust the selector so that it matches with the
local power supply.
3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the
set is now ready for use.
4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set
from the wall jack.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
–
is shown if you have inserted a
non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc.
Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to
read.
4. Press 2; to start playback.
=Display: Current track number and elapsed track
time during MP3-CD / CD playback.
=If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown.
5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to
resume play.
= Time digits flashes during pause.
6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9.
7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when:
– the CD door is opened
– the CD has reached the end
– you select other sound source.
MP3-CD/ CD text display
During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information:
MP3-CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– track name and elapsed track time;
– album name and elapsed track time;
– album number, track number and elapsed track
time;
– ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display
shows
.
CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback;
– Remaining playback time of current track.
Selecting a different track
• Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡
or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track
number appears in the display.
• If you have selected a track number shortly after
loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will
need to press 2; to start playback.
The type plate is located on the bottom of
the set.
BASIC FUNCTIONS
Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and
the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of
VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory.
Adjusting volume and sound (See 2)
1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control.
= Display shows the volume level
and a
number from 0-32.
2. wOOx
To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or
more to switch on / off.
= wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is
turned on.
Notes:
- wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
- Some discs might be recorded in high modulation,
which causes a distortion at high volume. If this
occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume.
3. EQUALIZER
To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press
EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME
within 3 seconds to adjust each level.
=Display briefly shows
, or
,
level (-5 to +5) or
.
Note:
1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album.
] Display:
if no albums are
available.
Finding a passage within a track
1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote
control 5 or 6).
– The CD is played at high speed and low volume.
– No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/
review.
2. When you recognize the passage you want,
release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on
the remote control 5 or 6)
Note: Searching is only possible within a track.
Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See
4 - 7)
You can select and change the various play modes
before or during playback. The play modes can also be
combined with PROGRAM.
shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are
played in random order
shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program
continuously in random order
repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program
repeat - plays the current track continuously
1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more.
(SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control).
2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position.
]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts
automatically.
3. To select normal playback, press MODE
repeatedly until the various modes are no longer
displayed.
– You can also press the 9 to cancel your play
mode in playing.
DIGITAL TUNER
2. To prevent sound interference the bass control
options operate exclusively. You cannot combine
the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx
4. GAMESOUND
To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once
or more to select your option.
=Display briefly shows
,
,
or
.
DIGITAL TUNER
1
until you have found optimal reception.
To improve radio reception:
• For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic
antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too
strong.
• For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this
antenna by turning the whole set.
HEAVY !
Take care of your CD Soundmachine.
Grip both handles when you carry or
lift the set.
Programming tuner stations:
1
Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you
play in GAME•AUX source.
You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the
memory, manually or automatically (Autostore).
2
How to MUTE the sound
1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt
sound reproduction instantly.
= Playback continues without sound and the
display flashes
.
Autostore
Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The
set will only program stations which are not in the
memory already.
1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
select the preset number .
2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate
auto store programming.
= Display:
is shown and available
stations are programmed in order of waveband
FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then
be played after all stations are stored
automatically.
2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can:
– press MUTE again;
– adjust the volume controls;
– change to another source.
DIGITAL TUNER (See 3)
Tuning to stations
1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press
SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press
TUNER once on the remote control).
= Display: shows
briefly followed by
waveband, frequency, and preset station
number if already stored.
2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select
your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control)
3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your
stations manually or by automatic search tuning:
Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote
control ) and release button when the frequency in
the display starts running.
= The radio automatically tunes to a station of
sufficient reception. Display shows
during automatic tuning.
4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the
desired station.
• To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or
6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
Programming track numbers
Program in the stop position to select and store your
CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store
any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be
stored in the memory.
1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your
desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or
™)
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the
remote control ¡ or ™).
2. Press PROG.
™ Display: program and the selected track
number
appears briefly.
™ Display :
if no track
selected for programming.
3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired
tracks.
™ Display:
if you try to program more
than 20 tracks.
4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;.
Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG
to add a current track to your program list.
Reviewing the program
In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a
while until the display shows all your stored track
numbers in sequence.
=Display
if no tracks programmed.
Erasing a program
You can erase the program by:
• pressing 9 twice;
=
displayed briefly, and program
disappears.
• pressing STANDBY ON y
• selecting another sound source
• opening the CD door.
@
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
Manual programming
1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to
stations).
2. Press PROG to activate programming.
= Display: program flashes.
1
#3
3
5
4
5
$
5. Repeat the above four steps to store other
stations.
Note : You can erase a preset station by storing
another frequency in its place.
2
4
3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station.
4. Press PROG again to confirm.
= Display shows the preset number, waveband
and the frequency of the preset station.
7
^
8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL
6
%
To listen to a preset station
Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until
the desired preset station is displayed.
GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
0
GAMESOUND (See 8)
PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND:
1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the
GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control)
=Display scrolls :
2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front
of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO
IN.
3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your
game sound option.
,
,
=Display briefly shows
or
.
Connecting other equipment to your system
Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO
OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on
a TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
USB PC LINK
Quick Setup Guide
PC system requirements
– USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP
– Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher
– CD-ROM drive
Installing MusicMatch software
1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the
USB port on your computer. (See B)
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or
more to select USB PC LINK.
3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK
installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This
application software can also be downloaded from
http://www.audio.philips.com.
IMPORTANT!
Please use this customized MusicMatch
software for your USB PC Link application.
Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch
jukebox software first from your PC system (if
available).
X
6
A
B
2 x AAA
USB
EL6095T004 / 8-02
USB PC LINK
USB PC LINK
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
GARANTIA LIMITADA
SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL
Cambio gratis por un año
Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo.
¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION?
Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el
producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando
que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante
de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo
a la mano.
¿QUE CUBRE?
La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que
usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta
fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso
con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un
producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el
período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía
original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del
producto de reemplazo.
¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA?
Su garantía no cubre:
• cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje
del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de
preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con
antena fuera de la unidad.
• reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz
de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u
otra causa no bajo el control de Philips.
• problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de
señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la
unidad.
• un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para
que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue
concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la
reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones.
• daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del
producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por
daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible
que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.
Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin
amparo de derechos de autor.)
• una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o
institucionales.
¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO?
Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con
distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países
donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de
servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo
(aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no
está fácilmente disponible).
ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO…
Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda.
Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039.
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS
EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES…
Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio.
También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y
transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante
de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación:
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía
implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y
aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en
cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto
que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la
duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación
arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.)
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL
CANADA…
Favor de comunicarse con Philips al:
1-800-661-6162 (francófono)
1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante)
(En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda
otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni
implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita
de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips
no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y
perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o
consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada,
aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.)
RECUERDE…
Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del
producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y
enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía.
Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario.
Modelo No.
________________________________
Serie No.
________________________________
4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it
does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows
Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe.
Then perform the following steps:
– Select your desired language from the list.
– Select installer driver.
– Select installer MusicMatch jukebox.
– Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies,
FAQ).
Note:
- You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial
before using it for the first time. Make sure the
volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure
sound output on the set. For optimum performance,
the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to
a low level.
5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create
your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and
dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC
into the playlist window.
Note:
-- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK,
please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)
stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit
www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates .
After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link"
for details on the USB PC LINK operations.
Enable digital CD audio output
Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is
necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows:
For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP
1. Enter the system panel menu and select
'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE',
'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and
'PROPERTIES'.
For Windows 98 SE
2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled).
Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer
to your PC's manual for correct configuration.
Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9)
The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set.
IMPORTANT!
Make sure the MusicMatch software has been
installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the
USB PC Link.
1. Turn on your set and computer .
] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and
not set to minimum / mute.
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once
or more to select USB PC LINK .
3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically
launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX.
] If the audio streaming is detected, the current
track name scrolls .
] If
scrolls for a while, check
the connection between your PC and set.
4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist
is highlighted.
5. Press 2; to start playback.
] The track time appears and the track name
scrolls once.
Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase.
6. If you want to see the track details displayed press
MODE.
During playback,
– Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all
available tracks in the playlist in random order.
– Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat
playback all the tracks in the playlist.
7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or
select another sound sources.
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0)
CD player and disc handling
• If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a
cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set
to repair.
• The lens of the CD player should never be touched!
• Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature
can cause condensation on the lens of your CD
player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not
attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a
warm environment until the moisture evaporates.
• To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the
center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free
cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may
damage the disc.
• Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it.
Safety Information
• Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity,
rain, sand or excessive heat.
• Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning
agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set.
• Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the
system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating.
• Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.
• Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus
(e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles).
If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable
to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center.
CAUTION
WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation.
circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty.
No sound /power
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
•
•
–
•
Volume not adjusted
Adjust the VOLUME
Power cord not securely connected
Connect the AC power cord properly
Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Headphones connected to the set
Disconnect headphones
Electrostatic discharge/interference
Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries
from the battery compartment. Press and hold
STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug /
replace battery supply, and try activating the set again.
When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's
volume is audible and not set to minimum.
When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer
to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output.
CD contains non-audio files
Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to
a CD audio track, instead of the data file
Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode
• Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console
Severe radio hum or noise
– Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or
computer
• Move the set to increase the distance
Remote control does not function properly
–
•
–
•
Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Distance/ angle between the set too large
Reduce the distance/ angle
Poor radio reception
– Weak radio signal
• FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial
indication
– CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized
• Use an unfinalized CD-R(W)
indication
–
•
–
•
–
•
No CD inserted
Inserted a suitable disc
CD badly scratched or dirty
Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance
Laser lens steamed up
Wait until lens has cleared
The CD skips tracks
– CD damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean CD
– shuffle or program is active
• Switch off shuffle / program
is displayed in USB PC LINK
mode for more than 10 sconds
– Check the connection between your PC and the set. If
necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to
USB PC Link for the initial setup required.
• Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the
MusicMatch software is working.
Sound skips during MP3 playback
– MP3 file made at compression level exceeding
320kbps
• Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks
into MP3 format
– Disc damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean disc
Cannot find desired MP3 title
– Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with
unsuitable text characters used
• Make sure the file names are typed in English
text characters an that the MP3 files end with
.mp3
Environmental information
We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3
materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene.
Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized
company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the
disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment.
Philips AZ2558
Tested To Comply
With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Philips Consumer Electronics North America
One Philips Drive
Knoxville TN 37914
Phone: 1-800-531-0039
az2558/17
13/5/03
12:15
Page 1
Return your Warranty Registration card today to
2558
MP3-CD Soundmachine
AZ
AZ
ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to.
Return
your Warranty
Registration Card
within 10 days
EE
CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER
RETURNING THE PRODUCT!
E
S
Philips representatives are ready to help you with
any questions about your new product.We can guide you
through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features.
We want you to start enjoying your new product right away!
RTAN
PO
• So complete and return the Warranty
Registration Card enclosed with your
purchase at once, and take advantage
of these important benefits.
T!
Need help? Call us!
IM
• Once your Philips purchase is registered,
you’re eligible to receive all the privileges
of owning a Philips product.
WH
Y INS
ID
1-800-531-0039
or
Visit us on the web at www.philips.com
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Warranty
Verification
Owner
Confirmation
Model
Registration
Registering your product
within 10 days confirms
your right to maximum
protection under the
terms and conditions of
your Philips warranty.
Your completed Warranty
Registration Card serves
as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss.
Returning your Warranty
Registration Card right
away guarantees you’ll
receive all the information
and special offers which
you qualify for as the
owner of your model.
8.
9.
Know these
safety symbols
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Model No. _______________________
Serial No. ________________________
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material
within your unit may cause
an electrical shock. For the safety of
everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
WARNING: TO PREVENT
The “exclamation point” calls
attention to features for
which you should read the
enclosed literature closely to prevent
operating and maintenance problems.
shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot, and fully insert.
FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO
NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION: To prevent electric
10.
11.
English
Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous
assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit.
• Dès que l’achat de votre appareil
Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à
tous les avantages dont bénéficient les
possesseurs des produits Philips.
Meet Philips at the Internet
• Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte
d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à
votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants.
Français
Español
Vérification
de garantie
Confirmation
de possession
Enregistrement
du modèle
Enregistrez votre produit
dans les 10 jours pour
confirmer votre droit à
une protection maximum
selon les termes et les
conditions de votre
garantie Philips.
Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie
prouve que vous possédez
l’appareil en cas de vol ou
de perte du produit.
Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès
aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les
informations, les offres et les
bonus auxquels vous avez
droit en tant que possesseur
de ce modèle.
AZ 2558
symboles de
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
sécurite
ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER
LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE
PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A
UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE.
Cet « éclair à pointe de
flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur
de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc
électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun,
nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le
boîtier de ce produit.
Printed in China
Canada
English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les
limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur
le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada.
Le « point d’exclamation »
attire votre attention sur des
sujets risquant de provoquer
des problèmes de fonctionnement et
d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant.
Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures :
– Relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une
3.
Respectez les avertissements.
étagère ou une table de type recom-
4.
Suivez toutes les instructions.
mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un
N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une
meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer
source d’eau.
avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci-
5.
7.
8.
12.
dent corporel si l’équipement se renver-
fon sec.
sait.
N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation.
doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps
fabricant.
prolongée.
N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de
amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur.
d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap-
Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la
pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap-
prise de terre ou prise
pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne
polarisée fournie. Une
fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute.
Prise
polarisée C.A.
IMPORTANT :
Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to
operate this device.
Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima
protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la
garantía de Philips.
Su Tarjeta de Registro de
la Garantía comprueba
que Ud. es el dueño del
aparato en caso de robo
o pérdida del producto.
La devolución inmediata de
su Tarjeta de Registro de la
Garantía le garantiza que
recibirá toda la información
y todas las promociones
especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño
de su modelo.
seguridad
dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est
blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou
dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième,
d’endommager l’appareil :
PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE
LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA
PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN
SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO.
El símbolo del «rayo» indica
que algún material no aislado
dentro de su unidad podría
resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para
la seguridad de todos, favor de no
remover la cubierta del producto.
de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement
El «signo de exclamación» le
llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud.
debe leer la información adjunta
detenidamente para evitar problemas
de funcionamiento y mantenimiento.
WHO IS COVERED?
You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product.
A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach
it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby.
WHAT IS COVERED?
Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product.
For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product
will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered
only for the original warranty period.When the warranty
on the original product expires, the warranty on the
replacement product also expires.
WHAT IS EXCLUDED?
Your warranty does not cover:
• labor charges for installation or setup of the product,
adjustment of customer controls on the product, and
installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the
product.
• product repair and/or part replacement because of
misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause
not within the control of Philips.
• reception problems caused by signal conditions or
cable or antenna systems outside the unit.
• a product that requires modification or adaptation to
enable it to operate in any country other than the
country for which it was designed, manufactured,
approved and/or authorized, or repair of products
damaged by these modifications.
• incidental or consequential damages resulting from the
product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above
exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not
limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted
or not copyrighted.)
• a product used for commercial or institutional purposes.
WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE?
You may exchange the product in all countries where the
product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries
where Philips does not distribute the product, the local
Philips service organization will attempt to provide a
replacement product (although there may be a delay if the
appropriate product is not readily available).
BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE...
Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you
have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039.
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A.,
PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS...
Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship
the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of
purchase enclosed, to the address listed below.
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the
duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do
not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may
last, this limitation may not apply to you.)
EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA...
Please contact Philips at:
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking)
(In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied,
including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any
circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or
consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified
of the possibility of such damages.)
REMEMBER...
Please record below the model and serial numbers found
on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty
registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify
you if necessary.
MODEL #
__________________________________
SERIAL #
__________________________________
lines, etc.).
●
Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période.
EL 6475-F003: 02/8
Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II
Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation.
INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8.
9.
10.
11.
MAC5097
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Échange gratuite pendant un an
Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger.
QUI EST COUVERT ?
Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir
bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou
un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que
vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme
preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les
garder tous les deux à portée de main.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ?
La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où
vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette
date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas
sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit
comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit
de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période
non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du
produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de
remplacement est terminée aussi.
QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ?
La garantie ne couvre pas :
• les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer,
pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer
les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit.
• la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du
mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées
ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par
Philips.
• des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal,
au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité.
• un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations
pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que
le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou
autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par
de telles modifications.
• des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du
produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas
l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est
donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au
cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative,
des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les
lois sur les droits d’auteur).
• un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou
institutionnelles.
OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ?
Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit
est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où
Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service
Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais
il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas
facilement disponible).
Lea estas instrucciones.
Conserve estas instrucciones.
Lea todos los avisos.
Siga todas las instrucciones.
No utilice este aparato cerca del
agua.
Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo
un trapo seco.
No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de
acuerdo con las instrucciones del
fabricante.
No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes
de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores,
estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor.
No anule la
seguridad de la
clavija de corriente
Clavija
polarizada
(ya sea de tipo polarde CA
izado o
con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas
tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la
otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra
tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la
de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más
ancha como la toma de tierra han sido
incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad
personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el
equipo no es compatible con su toma de
corriente, consulte a un electricista para
sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta.
Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más
próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida
del equipo.
Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados
por el fabricante.
12.
Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros,
bases, trípodes, soportes o
mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el
equipo. Cuando utilice un carro,
tenga cuidado al desplazar el
conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco.
13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser
utilizado durante largo tiempo.
14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las
reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre
que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el
cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que
hubieran podido introducirse en su interior,
por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a
ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no
funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera
sufrido algún tipo de caída.
15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para
prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden
ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a
su propiedad o dañar la unidad:
● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad.
● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o
de carbono y alcalinas, etc.).
● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la
unidad durante largo tiempo.
EL 6475-S003: 02/8
Símbolo del equipo Clase II
Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento.
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
– remote control
– USB cable
– video cable
– CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers
– AC power cord
TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1)
1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack.
Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones
are connected to the set.
2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level
(BASS/ MID /HIGH)
3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off.
4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/
TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX
5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control
6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set
7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power.
8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
SEARCH ∞ , §
MP3-CD / CD :
- searches backward or forward ;
- skips to the beginning of a current track/
previous/ later track.
USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a
previous/ later track.
TUNER : - tunes to radio stations
2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
MODE :
- selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat
or shuffle order.
9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the
USB port of your computer
0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode
WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off
EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high
frequencies.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
GARANTIE LIMITÉE
AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE…
Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance.
Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au
1-800-531-0039.
POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES
ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES…
Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange.
Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec
preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous :
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie
implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude
à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie
explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces
ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite,
cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.)
POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE
AU CANADA…
Veuillez contacter Philips au :
1-800-661-6162 (Francophone)
1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone)
(Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute
autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle
soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite
de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est
pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit
directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents,
quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une
notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.)
RAPPEL IMPORTANT...
Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de
série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez
remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de
garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en
cas de besoin.
Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________
Nº DE SÉRIE
_____________________________
options recommandés par le fabricant.
No. de serie ______________________
sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla
ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha.
des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca-
11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou
No. de modelo ____________________
PRECAUCION: Para evitar
Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec
de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même.
Para uso del cliente:
Escriba abajo el número de serie que se
encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde
esta información para el futuro.
TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA
ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO
EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA
NI A HUMEDAD.
Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels
qu’indiqués sur l’appareil.
●
aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point
7.
ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI-
●
10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter
PRECAUCION
RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA
NO ABRIR
toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des
pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale.
MAC5097
Registro
del modelo
15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter
sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise
chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne
correspondante de la prise et pousser
jusqu’au fond.
• Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida
la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
empacada con su aparato y saque
provecho de estas ventajas importantes.
qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a
subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon
deux lames
DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les
14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel
de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des
prise polarisée est dotée de
N° de série ______________________
CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A
UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR
ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE
ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE.
13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il
Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du
chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches
9.
Utilisez uniquement un meuble
Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif-
plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre
Confirmación
del dueño
simbolos de
One Year Free Exchange
This product must be carried in for an exchange.
EL 6475-E004: 02/8
Conservez ces instructions.
N° de modèle ____________________
Verificación
de la garantía
Conozca estos
●
2.
6.
The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
●
PORTABLE AUDIO
SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE
Cet espace vous est réservé
Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé
à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir.
Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía
para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes.
• Una vez que se registre la compra de
su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a
todas las ventajas correspondientes al
dueño de un producto Philips.
●
Lisez ces instructions.
murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien
3140 115 3102.1
15.
1.
AT T E N T I O N
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
14.
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES
6.
Connaissez ces
13.
Use only with the cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer or
sold with the apparatus. When a
cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning
storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent
battery leakage which may result in bodily
injury, property damage, or damage to the
unit:
Install all batteries correctly, + and - as
marked on the unit.
Do not mix batteries (old and new or
carbon and alkaline, etc.).
Remove batteries when the unit is not
used for a long time.
Class II equipment symbol
This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system.
http://www.philips.com
W
12.
English
This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
MAC5097
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near
water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the
manufacturer´s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
Do not defeat
the safety
purpose of the
AC Polarized
polarized or
Plug
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has
two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and
a third grounding prong.The wide blade or
the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being
walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories
specified by the manufacturer.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171
IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS
Supported formats:
• Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session
CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs.
• MP3 music fomats.
• MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable
bit rate.
• 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs.
• Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels
(max. 64 characters).
General information
The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio
Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a
factor up to 10 without losing significant sound
quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of
CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM.
How to get MP3 music
Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or
convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3
encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W).
• To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at
least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files.
• Some encoder software offer an option to protect
music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the
computer which created them. If you burn such
files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this
set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option
in the encoder software before creating the music
files. In this case you are responsible for
adherence to all local or international copyrights.
When burning the MP3-CD
• To avoid problems with playback or missing files,
make sure the file names are typed in English text
characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3
• Use a writing software capable of recording MP3
track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical
order. For details on using the software, refer to
the operating instructions of the software.
• When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you
close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to
read and play your tracks.
CONTROL
PROG
MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the
programmed songs;
TUNER : - programs radio stations.
FM•AM / DISPLAY
FM•AM : - selects waveband
DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions
! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for
external audio appliance.
VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place
@ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door
BACK PANEL (See 1)
# Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception
$ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type
R-20, UM-1 or D-cells
% AC MAINS - inlet for power cord
^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a
TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
REMOTE CONTROL (See 1)
1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source
TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands
USB - selects USB PC LINK
AUX - selects GAME •AUX
2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set
operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if
battery powered)
3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source
or selects the repeat modes in CD source
SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random
order in CD / USB PC LINK source
MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound
4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer
level (BASS/ MID /HIGH)
5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD /
USB PC LINK playback
9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback;
- erases a MP3-CD / CD program.
2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK
playback
5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a
MP3-CD / CD track.
TUNER: - tunes to radio stations
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
How to organize MP3 files
You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums
and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song
file sizes.
Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted.
• MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as
numbers in the display.
IMPORTANT!
This set does not play/support the following:
• Empty albums: an empty album is an album that
does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown
in the display.
• Non-supported file formats are skipped. This
means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3
files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not
be played.
• Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC,
Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer
7.0, MusicMatch.
• Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and
Package Writing.
Playing MP3-CD & CD
This CD player plays Audio Discs including
CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs.
• CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not
possible.
1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then
select CD SOURCE.
2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door.
]
is displayed when the CD door is
open.
3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press
down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door.
]Display show
,when reading disc
contents;
]Display :
if no disc inserted/
disc incorrectly inserted.,
]Display :
or
if disc damaged / dirty:.
–
throughout CD operation;
–
throughout MP3-CD operation;
– In CD stop mode: total track number and total
playback time.
POWER SUPPLY
BASIC FUNCTIONS
6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high
frequencies
WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off
GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/
PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode
7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + :
MP3 only :- select previous / next album.
TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station.
POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY
As a power-saving feature, the system automatically
switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has
reached the end and no control is operated.
POWER SUPPLY
Whenever convenient, use the power supply to
conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the
power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting
batteries.
Switching on and off and selecting function
1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on.
2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your
desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or
GAME•AUX .
3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Batteries (not included) (See 1)
• Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells,
(preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity.
Remote control (See A)
• Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4
(preferably alkaline).
Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the
batteries to burst.
• Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon
zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set.
• When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old
batteries with the new ones.
• Batteries contain chemical substances, so
they should be disposed of properly.
Using AC Power
1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the
type plate located on the bottom of the set,
corresponds to your local power supply. If it does
not, consult your dealer or service center.
2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector,
adjust the selector so that it matches with the
local power supply.
3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the
set is now ready for use.
4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set
from the wall jack.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
–
is shown if you have inserted a
non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc.
Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to
read.
4. Press 2; to start playback.
=Display: Current track number and elapsed track
time during MP3-CD / CD playback.
=If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown.
5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to
resume play.
= Time digits flashes during pause.
6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9.
7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set.
Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when:
– the CD door is opened
– the CD has reached the end
– you select other sound source.
MP3-CD/ CD text display
During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information:
MP3-CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– track name and elapsed track time;
– album name and elapsed track time;
– album number, track number and elapsed track
time;
– ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display
shows
.
CDs
Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g.
– Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback;
– Remaining playback time of current track.
Selecting a different track
• Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡
or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track
number appears in the display.
• If you have selected a track number shortly after
loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will
need to press 2; to start playback.
The type plate is located on the bottom of
the set.
BASIC FUNCTIONS
Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and
the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of
VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory.
Adjusting volume and sound (See 2)
1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control.
= Display shows the volume level
and a
number from 0-32.
2. wOOx
To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or
more to switch on / off.
= wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is
turned on.
Notes:
- wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
- Some discs might be recorded in high modulation,
which causes a distortion at high volume. If this
occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume.
3. EQUALIZER
To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press
EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME
within 3 seconds to adjust each level.
=Display briefly shows
, or
,
level (-5 to +5) or
.
Note:
1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB
PC LINK and GAME•AUX source.
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album.
] Display:
if no albums are
available.
Finding a passage within a track
1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote
control 5 or 6).
– The CD is played at high speed and low volume.
– No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/
review.
2. When you recognize the passage you want,
release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on
the remote control 5 or 6)
Note: Searching is only possible within a track.
Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See
4 - 7)
You can select and change the various play modes
before or during playback. The play modes can also be
combined with PROGRAM.
shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are
played in random order
shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program
continuously in random order
repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program
repeat - plays the current track continuously
1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more.
(SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control).
2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position.
]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts
automatically.
3. To select normal playback, press MODE
repeatedly until the various modes are no longer
displayed.
– You can also press the 9 to cancel your play
mode in playing.
DIGITAL TUNER
2. To prevent sound interference the bass control
options operate exclusively. You cannot combine
the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx
4. GAMESOUND
To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once
or more to select your option.
=Display briefly shows
,
,
or
.
DIGITAL TUNER
1
until you have found optimal reception.
To improve radio reception:
• For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic
antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too
strong.
• For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this
antenna by turning the whole set.
HEAVY !
Take care of your CD Soundmachine.
Grip both handles when you carry or
lift the set.
Programming tuner stations:
1
Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you
play in GAME•AUX source.
You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the
memory, manually or automatically (Autostore).
2
How to MUTE the sound
1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt
sound reproduction instantly.
= Playback continues without sound and the
display flashes
.
Autostore
Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The
set will only program stations which are not in the
memory already.
1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
select the preset number .
2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate
auto store programming.
= Display:
is shown and available
stations are programmed in order of waveband
FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then
be played after all stations are stored
automatically.
2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can:
– press MUTE again;
– adjust the volume controls;
– change to another source.
DIGITAL TUNER (See 3)
Tuning to stations
1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press
SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press
TUNER once on the remote control).
= Display: shows
briefly followed by
waveband, frequency, and preset station
number if already stored.
2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select
your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control)
3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your
stations manually or by automatic search tuning:
Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote
control ) and release button when the frequency in
the display starts running.
= The radio automatically tunes to a station of
sufficient reception. Display shows
during automatic tuning.
4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the
desired station.
• To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or
6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly
MP3-CD / CD PLAYER
Programming track numbers
Program in the stop position to select and store your
CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store
any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be
stored in the memory.
1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your
desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or
™)
MP3-CD mode only:
First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to
find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the
remote control ¡ or ™).
2. Press PROG.
™ Display: program and the selected track
number
appears briefly.
™ Display :
if no track
selected for programming.
3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired
tracks.
™ Display:
if you try to program more
than 20 tracks.
4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;.
Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG
to add a current track to your program list.
Reviewing the program
In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a
while until the display shows all your stored track
numbers in sequence.
=Display
if no tracks programmed.
Erasing a program
You can erase the program by:
• pressing 9 twice;
=
displayed briefly, and program
disappears.
• pressing STANDBY ON y
• selecting another sound source
• opening the CD door.
@
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
Manual programming
1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to
stations).
2. Press PROG to activate programming.
= Display: program flashes.
1
#3
3
5
4
5
$
5. Repeat the above four steps to store other
stations.
Note : You can erase a preset station by storing
another frequency in its place.
2
4
3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to
allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station.
4. Press PROG again to confirm.
= Display shows the preset number, waveband
and the frequency of the preset station.
7
^
8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL
6
%
To listen to a preset station
Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until
the desired preset station is displayed.
GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
0
GAMESOUND (See 8)
PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND:
1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the
GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control)
=Display scrolls :
2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front
of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO
IN.
3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your
game sound option.
,
,
=Display briefly shows
or
.
Connecting other equipment to your system
Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO
OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on
a TV or VCR for viewing or recording.
USB PC LINK
Quick Setup Guide
PC system requirements
– USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP
– Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher
– CD-ROM drive
Installing MusicMatch software
1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the
USB port on your computer. (See B)
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or
more to select USB PC LINK.
3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK
installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This
application software can also be downloaded from
http://www.audio.philips.com.
IMPORTANT!
Please use this customized MusicMatch
software for your USB PC Link application.
Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch
jukebox software first from your PC system (if
available).
X
6
A
B
2 x AAA
USB
EL6095T004 / 8-02
USB PC LINK
USB PC LINK
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
GARANTIA LIMITADA
SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL
Cambio gratis por un año
Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo.
¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION?
Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el
producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando
que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante
de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo
a la mano.
¿QUE CUBRE?
La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que
usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta
fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso
con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un
producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el
período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía
original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del
producto de reemplazo.
¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA?
Su garantía no cubre:
• cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje
del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de
preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con
antena fuera de la unidad.
• reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz
de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u
otra causa no bajo el control de Philips.
• problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de
señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la
unidad.
• un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para
que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue
concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la
reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones.
• daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del
producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por
daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible
que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.
Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin
amparo de derechos de autor.)
• una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o
institucionales.
¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO?
Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con
distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países
donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de
servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo
(aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no
está fácilmente disponible).
ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO…
Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda.
Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039.
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS
EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES…
Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio.
También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y
transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante
de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación:
Philips Exchange Program
Suite A
406 North Irish Street
Greeneville TN 37745
(En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía
implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y
aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en
cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto
que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la
duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación
arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.)
PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL
CANADA…
Favor de comunicarse con Philips al:
1-800-661-6162 (francófono)
1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante)
(En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda
otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni
implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita
de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips
no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y
perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o
consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada,
aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.)
RECUERDE…
Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del
producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y
enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía.
Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario.
Modelo No.
________________________________
Serie No.
________________________________
4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it
does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows
Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe.
Then perform the following steps:
– Select your desired language from the list.
– Select installer driver.
– Select installer MusicMatch jukebox.
– Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies,
FAQ).
Note:
- You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial
before using it for the first time. Make sure the
volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure
sound output on the set. For optimum performance,
the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to
a low level.
5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create
your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and
dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC
into the playlist window.
Note:
-- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK,
please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)
stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit
www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates .
After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link"
for details on the USB PC LINK operations.
Enable digital CD audio output
Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is
necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows:
For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP
1. Enter the system panel menu and select
'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE',
'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and
'PROPERTIES'.
For Windows 98 SE
2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled).
Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer
to your PC's manual for correct configuration.
Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro.
Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171
EL6095T004 / 8-02
Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9)
The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set.
IMPORTANT!
Make sure the MusicMatch software has been
installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the
USB PC Link.
1. Turn on your set and computer .
] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and
not set to minimum / mute.
2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once
or more to select USB PC LINK .
3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically
launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX.
] If the audio streaming is detected, the current
track name scrolls .
] If
scrolls for a while, check
the connection between your PC and set.
4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist
is highlighted.
5. Press 2; to start playback.
] The track time appears and the track name
scrolls once.
Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase.
6. If you want to see the track details displayed press
MODE.
During playback,
– Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all
available tracks in the playlist in random order.
– Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat
playback all the tracks in the playlist.
7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or
select another sound sources.
MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0)
CD player and disc handling
• If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a
cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set
to repair.
• The lens of the CD player should never be touched!
• Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature
can cause condensation on the lens of your CD
player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not
attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a
warm environment until the moisture evaporates.
• To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the
center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free
cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may
damage the disc.
• Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it.
Safety Information
• Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity,
rain, sand or excessive heat.
• Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning
agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set.
• Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the
system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating.
• Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.
• Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus
(e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles).
If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable
to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center.
CAUTION
WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation.
circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty.
No sound /power
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
–
•
•
•
–
•
Volume not adjusted
Adjust the VOLUME
Power cord not securely connected
Connect the AC power cord properly
Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Headphones connected to the set
Disconnect headphones
Electrostatic discharge/interference
Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries
from the battery compartment. Press and hold
STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug /
replace battery supply, and try activating the set again.
When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's
volume is audible and not set to minimum.
When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer
to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output.
CD contains non-audio files
Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to
a CD audio track, instead of the data file
Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode
• Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console
Severe radio hum or noise
– Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or
computer
• Move the set to increase the distance
Remote control does not function properly
–
•
–
•
Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted
Insert (fresh) batteries correctly
Distance/ angle between the set too large
Reduce the distance/ angle
Poor radio reception
– Weak radio signal
• FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial
indication
– CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized
• Use an unfinalized CD-R(W)
indication
–
•
–
•
–
•
No CD inserted
Inserted a suitable disc
CD badly scratched or dirty
Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance
Laser lens steamed up
Wait until lens has cleared
The CD skips tracks
– CD damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean CD
– shuffle or program is active
• Switch off shuffle / program
is displayed in USB PC LINK
mode for more than 10 sconds
– Check the connection between your PC and the set. If
necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to
USB PC Link for the initial setup required.
• Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the
MusicMatch software is working.
Sound skips during MP3 playback
– MP3 file made at compression level exceeding
320kbps
• Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks
into MP3 format
– Disc damaged or dirty
• Replace or clean disc
Cannot find desired MP3 title
– Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with
unsuitable text characters used
• Make sure the file names are typed in English
text characters an that the MP3 files end with
.mp3
Environmental information
We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3
materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene.
Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized
company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the
disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment.
Philips AZ2558
Tested To Comply
With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Philips Consumer Electronics North America
One Philips Drive
Knoxville TN 37914
Phone: 1-800-531-0039